2017 GIULIA QUADRIFOLIGO

2017 GIULIA QUADRIFOLIGO 17GA-126-AD OWNER’S MANUAL ©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. is a registered trademark of Fourth Edition Rev 1 FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission. Printed in U.S.A. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA features and equipment that are either standard or op- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a EQUIPMENT Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable. manual that are not on this vehicle. equipment must be installed properly by trained person- accidents. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to nel. The following must be observed during installation. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- The positive power connection should be made directly Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. normal may require special precautions. drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- The negative power connection should be made to body portation. factured. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the WARNING! vehicle’s electronic systems. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may slower, and your judgment is impaired when you affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. vehicles so equipped. Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC DEAR CUSTOMER Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo. We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Please take the necessary time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle. Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo. Youare advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, , and vehicle behavior on different road surfaces. This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time. In the provided Warranty Booklet, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. The New Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at Alfa Romeo. For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact the Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center: P.O.Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872) READ THIS CAREFULLY

Refueling Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vital components of the supply system. For further details on the use of the correct fuel, see the "Fuel Requirements" paragraph in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Starting The Engine

Make sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and then push the engine START/STOP button.

Parking On Flammable Material

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard.

Respecting The Environment

The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment.

Electrical Accessories

If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact your authorized dealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

Scheduled Servicing

Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs. VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS Accessories Purchased By The Owner

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured.

If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact your authorized dealer. Dealer personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery.

Note: Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedals (mats, etc.). FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices FCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in compliance with manufacturer's specifications.

Note: Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been installed. This also may void the warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it. FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate antenna is mounted externally. Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of approved mobile phones is concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer.

Caution!

The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive Entry/Keyless Start system may occur may occur. HOWTO USE THIS MANUAL Operating Instructions Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the perspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the text as appropriate. The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the index at the end of this manual. Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the side of each even page. Warnings And Cautions While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries. There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle. Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols: Personal Safety: Vehicle Safety: Note: This Owner’s Manual describes the Quadrifoglio model. Optional contents, including equipment meant for specific Markets or particular models, are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the model you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside of the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified with the wording (if-equipped). All data contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact your authorized dealer. Symbols Some components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.

IT CAN START READ THE OWNER DO NOTTOUCH WITH AUTOMATICALLYALSO HANDBOOK HANDS WITH ENGINE OFF

DO NOT OPEN THE CAP DO NOT OPEN: HIGH PROTECT YOUR EYES WHEN THE ENGINE IS PRESSURE GAS HOT

MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS KEEP CHILDREN ATA BURSTING OF YOUR BODY AND DISTANCE CLOTHES AWAY

DO NOT APPROACH CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE FLAMES GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

03016S0002EM Front View 1 — Headlights 4 — Doors 2 — Tires And Wheels 5 — Engine Compartment 3 — Exterior Mirrors 6 — Windshield

9 REAR VIEW

03026S0002EM Rear View 1 — Tail Lights 2 — Trunk Lid

10 INSTRUMENT PANEL

03036S0050EM Instrument Panel 1 — Headlight Switch 5 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Climate Control System 2 — Air Vents 6 — Steering Wheel 10 — Glove Compartment 3 — Multifunction Stalk 7 — Windshield Wiper Stalk 11 — Passenger-Side Air Bag 4 — Controls On Steering Wheel 8 — Information And Entertainment System

11 VEHICLE INTERIOR

03046S0001EM Vehicle Interior 1 — Driver Seat 4 — Hazard Warning Lights 2 — Power Windows/Power Mirrors Controls 5 — Alfa DNA Pro System 3 — Gear Selector/Paddle Shifter

12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

In this section, you will find important KEYS...... 14 information to help you become familiar IGNITION SYSTEM ...... 16 with the features needed to operate your ENGINE IMMOBILIZER ...... 18 vehicle, and how they function. SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 19 DOORS...... 20 SEATS...... 25 HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 29 STEERING WHEEL ...... 30 MIRRORS ...... 32 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 33 INTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 36 WINDSHIELD WIPERS ...... 38 CLIMATE CONTROL ...... 41 POWERWINDOWS...... 47 HOOD...... 49 TRUNK ...... 50 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 51 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS...... 55 ACTIVE AERODYNAMICS ...... 56

13 KEYS panic alarm will remain active for three Operation minutes, and can be deactivated: Key Fob Door And Trunk Lid Unlock By pushing the PANIC button again. Yourvehicle uses a keyless ignition Briefly pushing the unlock button on the system. This system includes a key fob Automatically if the vehicle speed key fob will unlock the doors and trunk and a keyless push button ignition. exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). lid, turn on the interior lights, and flash the turn signals once (if activated from In both cases, the panic alarm is The Remote Keyless Entry key fob allows the Information and Entertainment immediately deactivated. you to lock or unlock the doors and trunk System). or activate the Panic Alarm from distances. The key fob does not need to Push and release the unlock button on the be pointed at the vehicle to activate the Warning! key fob once to unlock the driver side system. front door or twice within one second to unlock all doors and the trunk lid. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the The current unlock setting can be into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, remove changed through the Information and the key fob from the vehicle and lock your Entertainment System menu, so that the vehicle. system unlocks: Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or All doors unlock on the first push of with access to an unlocked vehicle. the key fob unlock button. Allowing children to be in a vehicle Unlock the driver door on the first GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE unattended is dangerous for a number of push of the key fob unlock button. reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned Flashing of the turn signals upon 04016S0001EM not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal locking/unlocking the doors and Key Fob or the gear selector. activation of the courtesy light upon PANIC Function unlocking the doors can be activated or Do not leave the key fob in or near the deactivated through the Information and The key fob contains a PANIC button. vehicle, or in a location accessible to Should you ever feel threatened, push children. A child could operate power Entertainment System. For further this button and the vehicle security alarm windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. information, refer to the Information and will sound. Entertainment System Owner’s Manual Do not leave children or animals inside Supplement. To activate the PANIC function, push and parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat hold the PANIC button for at least one build-up may cause serious injury or death. The doors can also be unlocked by using second. When the panic alarm is active, the emergency key, located inside the the headlights turn on, the turn signals key fob. flash, the horn honks intermittently, and all interior adjustable lights turn on. The 14 Door And Trunk Lid Lock parking lights functions were already Briefly pushing the lock button on the key active, it will remain active). fob will lock the doors and trunk lid, turn This function is available only if the doors off the interior lights, and flash the turn are closed. signals (if activated in the Information Replacing The Electronic Key Fob and Entertainment System). Battery If one or more doors are open, these doors will also lock, and this is indicated To replace the battery, proceed as by a rapid flashing of the turn signals. The follows: doors prepare for locking, which 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward becomes active from the moment they and extract the cover pulling downwards. 04016S0003EM are closed. The doors will unlock again Removing Emergency Key only if the key fob is detected inside the passenger compartment. 3. Remove the battery plug by rotating it counter clockwise. The doors can be locked by using the emergency key in the driver’s side door lock. Trunk Lid Opening Rapidly push the trunk lid key fob button twice to open the trunk lid. The turn signals will flash to indicate that the trunk lid has been opened. 04016S0002EM Remote Start Key Fob Cover Removal The remote start button on the key fob enables engine starting (push the button 2. Remove the emergency key from its housing. 04016S0004EM twice to start the engine). Removing Battery Plug Car Finder 4. Remove the battery from its slot and Push the lock or unlock button to replace it with a new one of the same remotely and temporarily turn on the turn type. signals and headlights. This is useful for finding the vehicle easily in a crowded area like a parking garage, for example. Pushing the lock or unlock button again will restart the lights turn on timer (if the 15 Duplicating Keys IGNITION SYSTEM If you need a replacement key fob, go to Operation an authorized dealer. To activate the keyless ignition, the key General Information fob must be inside the passenger The following regulatory statement compartment. applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

04016S0005EM license-exempt RSS standard(s). Battery Location Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Proceed in reverse order to reassemble the key. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

Caution! 2. This device must accept any 04026S0001EM interference received, including Keyless Ignition START/STOP Button interference that may cause undesired The battery replacement operation must be operation. The keyless ignition has the following

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE modes: done with care, in order not to damage the Note: Changes or modifications not electronic key. expressly approved by the party STOP: engine off, steering locked. responsible for compliance could void the Some electrical devices (e.g. central door Request For Additional Keys user’s authority to operate the locking system, alarm, etc.) are still equipment. available. The system can recognize up to eight key fobs with remote control. ON: all electrical devices are available. To guarantee that the engine starts and This state can be entered by pushing the the vehicle operates correctly, use only ignition button once, without pressing the electronic key fobs specifically coded for brake pedal. the vehicle’s electronics. AVV: engine starting. This state can be If an electronic key fob is coded for a entered by pushing the ignition button vehicle, it cannot be used on any other once while pressing the brake pedal. vehicle.

16 Note: Children should be warned not to touch the Starting With A Discharged Key Fob Battery With the keyless ignition in the ON parking brake, brake pedal or the position: if 30 minutes pass with the transmission gear selector. If the key fob battery is discharged, gear selector in P (Park) and the engine Do not leave the key fob in or near the proceed as follows to start the vehicle: stopped, the keyless ignition will vehicle, (or in a location accessible to automatically reset to the STOP children), and do not leave the ignition in the 1. Lift the front armrest. position. AVVor ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the 2. Lay the key fob on the key fob outline With the engine started, it is possible vehicle. found on the floor of the armrest to remove the key fob from the vehicle. compartment while pushing the Be sure the parking brake is fully START/STOP button to start the ignition. The engine will remain running and the disengaged before driving; failure to do so instrument cluster will indicate the can lead to brake failure and a collision. absence of the key fob when the door is closed. Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause For more information on the engine damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the start-up, refer to "Starting The Engine" in transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may "Starting And Operating." allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake Warning! engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious

damage to the brake system. 04026S0002EM Never use the PARK position as a Key Fob Placement Location substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to Caution! guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. If the Brake System Warning Light remains When exiting the vehicle, always make on with the parking brake released, a brake sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove system malfunction is indicated. Have the the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your brake system serviced by an authorized vehicle. dealer immediately. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured.

17 General Information ENGINE IMMOBILIZER the other keys provided. If it is still not possible to start the engine, contact an The following regulatory statement Engine Immobilizer Operation authorized dealer. applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: The Engine Immobilizer system prevents If the Engine Immobilizer Failure/ unauthorized use of the vehicle by Break-in Attempt icon is displayed This device complies with Part 15 of the disabling engine starting. while driving, this means that the system FCC Rules and with Industry Canada is running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a license-exempt RSS standard(s). The system does not need to be enabled voltage drop). If the display persists, Operation is subject to the following two or activated. Operation of the contact an authorized dealer. conditions: immobilizer is automatic whether the vehicle's doors are locked or unlocked. Note: 1. This device may not cause harmful When the ignition is set to ON, the Engine interference, and Immobilizer system identifies the code Do not tamper with the Engine Immobilizer system. Any modifications 2. This device must accept any transmitted by the key. If the code is recognized as valid, the Engine or alterations could cause the protection interference received, including function to be deactivated. interference that may cause undesired Immobilizer system enables engine operation. starting. The Engine Immobilizer system is not Note: Changes or modifications not When the ignition is brought back to compatible with certain aftermarket expressly approved by the party STOP,the Engine Immobilizer system remote starting systems. The use of responsible for compliance could void the deactivates the control unit controlling these devices could cause problems user’s authority to operate the the engine, disabling engine starting. when starting, as well as the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE equipment. For the correct engine starting deactivation of the protection function. procedures, refer to “Starting The All keys provided with the vehicle Engine” in “Starting And Operating.” have been programmed in accordance Irregular Operation with the electronics on the vehicle itself. If the key code is not recognized during Each key has its own code which must starting, the Engine Immobilizer be stored by the system's control unit. Failure/Break-in Attempt icon is Contact an authorized dealer to have displayed on the instrument panel (refer new keys (up to eight) stored with a to "Warning Lights And Messages" in code. "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel"). This condition leads to the engine turning off after two seconds. In this case, switch the ignition to STOP and then to ON; if it is still blocked, try with

18 SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — information, refer to "Passive Entry" in If a second acoustic signal is emitted IF EQUIPPED "Doors.” after the alarm is already armed, wait about four seconds and disarm the alarm Alarm Activation by pushing the unlock button. Verify that While armed, the alarm will sound in the the doors, hood, and trunk lid are closed following scenarios: correctly and then rearm the system by pushing the lock button on the key fob. Opening of doors/hood/deck lid If the alarm emits an acoustic signal even (perimeter protection) when the doors, hood, and trunk lid are Operation of ignition with a key which correctly closed, a fault has occurred in is not validated system operation. In this case, contact an authorized dealer. Cutting of the battery cables To Disarm The Alarm Movement inside the passenger 04056S0003EM Passive Entry Door Handle Button compartment (volumetric protection — if Push the unlock button to disarm the equipped) When the alarm is armed, the warning alarm. While disarming, the following lights on the panels of the interior front operations are performed: Unexpected lifting/tilting of the door handles will flash. vehicle (anti-lift protection — if Two brief flashes of the turn signals (if equipped) programmed) Activation of the alarm triggers the Two brief acoustic signals (if acoustic warning and the turn signals. programmed) Note: The alarm system is activated by the Engine Immobilizer system, which is Doors are unlocked automatically activated when you get out The alarm can also be disarmed using the of the vehicle with the key fob and lock Passive Entry System, by grasping one of the doors. the Passive Entry front door handles with a valid key fob in hand to unlock. For To Arm The Alarm further information refer to "Passive With the doors, hood, and trunk lid closed 04046S0001EM Entry" in "Doors.” and the keyless ignition system placed in Lock/Unlock Buttons the STOP position, push and release the The activation of the alarm is preceded lock button on the key fob. The alarm can by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is also be armed by pushing the Passive detected, the system emits a further Entry door handle button, located on the acoustic signal. exterior door handle. For further 19 DOORS Locking And Unlocking Doors From The Inside If all doors are closed properly, they will automatically lock once the vehicle has exceeded approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) (“Auto Relock” function active). Push the interior lock button on the driver or passenger side door panel trim to lock

04056S0003EM 04046S0002EM the doors. Passive Entry Door Handle Button Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection Button With doors locked, push the unlock button on the interior trim panel to Note: The alarm does not disarm when Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift unlock the doors. the doors are unlocked by inserting the Protection must be repeated each time blade of the emergency key, found inside the instrument panel is switched off. Note: The key fob may not be found if it the key fob, into the door handle lock is located next to a mobile phone, lap top To Disarm The Alarm Using Passive cylinder. or other electronic device; these devices Entry may block the key fob’s wireless signal. Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection — If To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g. Equipped during a long period of vehicle inactivity), GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To ensure the correct operation of the insert the blade of the emergency key, Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system, found inside the key fob, into the door completely close the side windows. handle lock cylinder and turn the To disable the function, push the emergency key to the right (clockwise) to Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button lock the door(s). before activating the alarm. When the function is disabled, this is indicated by the light on the Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button 04056S0001EM flashing for several seconds. Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel

20 Locking/Unlocking Doors From The The key fob is detected only after the Outside system recognizes the presence of a Warning! hand on one of the front door handles. If When locking the doors from the outside the detected key fob is valid, the doors with the doors closed, push the lock and the trunk lid are unlocked (refer to Do not leave children or animals inside button on the key fob. parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat the Information and Entertainment build-up may cause serious injury or death. The door lock can be activated with all System Owner’s Manual Supplement for doors locked and the trunk lid open. When Passive Entry Settings). For personal security and safety in the the lock button on the key fob is pushed, Note: The key fob may not be able to be event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as all locks are activated, including the open you drive as well as when you park and leave detected by the vehicle keyless-go trunk lid. The trunk lid will be locked when the vehicle. system if it is located next to a mobile it is closed. phone, laptop or other electronic device; Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the When unlocking the doors from the automatic transmission into PARK, apply the these devices may block the key fob’s parking brake, turn the engine OFF, remove outside, push the unlock button on the wireless signal and prevent the the key fob from the vehicle and lock your key fob. keyless-go system from starting the vehicle. Locking/Unlocking Doors From The vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Outside In An Emergency Grasping the handle of the driver's door with access to an unlocked vehicle. If the battery is discharged or the key fob unlocks the driver's side door, or all doors is inoperable, you can lock or unlock the Allowing children to be in a vehicle depending on the mode set using the unattended is dangerous for a number of doors from the outside by inserting the Information and Entertainment System reasons. A child or others could be seriously blade of the emergency key, found inside (refer to the Information and or fatally injured. Children should be warned the key fob, into the door handle lock Entertainment System Owner’s Manual not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal cylinder and turn the emergency key as Supplement for Passive Entry Settings). or the gear selector. follows. Note: If wearing gloves, or if it has rained Do not leave the key fob in or near the Lock — Turn the emergency key to the and the door handle is wet, the activation vehicle, or in a location accessible to right (clockwise) sensitivity of the Passive Entry function children. A child could operate power may be reduced, resulting in a longer windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Unlock — Turn the emergency key to reaction time. the left (counter clockwise) Door Locking Passive Entry — If Equipped Caution! To lock the doors, proceed as follows: The Passive Entry system can identify the presence of a key fob near the doors 1. Make sure that you have the key fob and are close to the driver’s or An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always and trunk lid. passenger’s side door handle. remove the key from the ignition and lock all The system enables the doors and trunk of the doors when leaving the vehicle lid to be locked or unlocked without unattended. pushing any button on the key fob. 21 2. Push the Passive Entry door handle possible to check whether the vehicle has button or the Passive Entry trunk lid been locked correctly by pulling the door button, which is located next to the handle within two seconds. The doors will exterior trunk lid release button. This will not be unlocked again. lock all doors and the trunk lid. Door The vehicle doors and trunk lid can be locking will activate the alarm as well. locked by pushing the lock button on the key fob or on the interior door lock. Driver Side Door Emergency Opening If the key fob does not work, e.g. because its battery is discharged or the vehicle battery is discharged, the emergency key 04016S0002EM can be used to unlock the driver side Emergency Key Release Buttons door. To remove the emergency key from the key fob, proceed as follows: 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward 04056S0003EM Passive Entry Door Handle Button and extract the cover pulling downwards. 2. Remove the emergency key from the key fob housing. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 3. Insert the emergency key in the driver side door lock cylinder and turn it to the left (counter clockwise) to unlock the

door. 04016S0003EM Emergency Key Note: The emergency key blade is not 04056S0006EM directional and can be inserted Passive Entry Trunk Lid Button indifferently into the lock. Note: After pushing the Passive Entry To avoid leaving the key fob inside door handle button, you must wait two the vehicle accidentally, the Passive seconds before the doors can be Entry function features an automatic unlocked again using the passive entry door unlocking function. door handle button. This feature makes it 22 If one of the vehicle doors is open and the "door locking" button on the front door handles or lock button in the interior door lock switch panel is pushed, a check of the inside and outside of the vehicle for the presence of the key fob is made once all the open doors are closed.

04056S0004EM 04056S0005EM Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button Locking Note: If the key fob is detected inside the If the key fob is inadvertently vehicle, the Passive Entry function forgotten inside of the trunk, and an automatically unlocks all the vehicle attempt is made to close it from outside, doors and flashes the turn signals. the trunk lid will not lock. With the doors 04056S0003EM If one or more key fobs are inside the Passive Entry Door Handle Button locked, the trunk lid unlocked, and the passenger compartment, the lock button key fob detected inside the vehicle, the on the key fob inside the passenger trunk lid will unlock again and the lights compartment is temporarily disabled. flash twice. The vehicle will not unlock the doors if an unauthorized key fob has been detected Before driving, make sure the trunk close to the outside of the vehicle. lid is closed correctly. If the Passive Entry function is disabled Trunk Lid Lock using the Information and Entertainment The trunk lid of the vehicle may still be System, the protections to avoid locked by pushing the lock button on the accidentally leaving the key fob inside key fob, pushing the door lock button on the vehicle are deactivated. the door handles, or pushing the lock 04056S0001EM Trunk Lid Access button on the interior door panel of the Interior Lock Switch Panel vehicle. Approaching the trunk lid with a valid key While pulling the handle, do not push the fob, push the opening button to access door lock/unlock button on the handle. the trunk lid.

23 On vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, 2. This device must accept any Deactivating The Power Lock the trunk lid and the doors can be locked interference received, including The Power Lock disengages by pushing the button located near the interference that may cause undesired automatically: opening button of the trunk lid. operation. When the doors are unlocked, pushing Note: Changes or modifications not the unlock button on the key fob. expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the When the keyless ignition is placed in user’s authority to operate the the ON position. equipment. Child Safety Locks Power Lock — If Equipped To provide a safer environment for small The Power Lock is a safety device that children riding in the rear seats, the rear prevents the operation of the interior doors are equipped with Child-Protection door handles and the door locking and Door Lock system. unlocking buttons. The Power Lock also This device can be engaged only with the 04056S0006EM prevent opening of the doors from inside Passive Entry Trunk Lid Button doors open. the passenger compartment. System Activation/Deactivation It is recommended to lock the vehicle The Passive entry system can be doors each time the vehicle is parked. activated or deactivated using the Activating The Power Lock

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Information and Entertainment System. The Power Lock is enabled on all the General Information doors by quickly pushing the lock button on the key fob twice. The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) The turn signals will flash to let you know devices equipped in this vehicle: that the Power Lock is active. This device complies with Part 15 of the If one or more of the doors are not closed correctly, the Power Lock will not 04056S0007EM FCC Rules and with Industry Canada Child Safety Lock Positions license-exempt RSS standard(s). activate, preventing a person from Operation is subject to the following two getting stuck inside the passenger Lock position: device locked (door conditions: compartment by entering the vehicle, and opened from exterior only) then closing, the open door. 1. This device may not cause harmful Unlock position: device unlocked (door interference, and may be opened from the inside) The Child Safety Locks remain locked even if the doors are unlocked. 24 Note: The rear doors cannot be opened Proceed as follows to realign the door SEATS from the inside when the Child Safety lock device (only when the battery charge The front seats can be adjusted to ensure Lock is engaged. has been restored): maximum comfort for the occupants. Unlocking The Doors With A Discharged Push the lock button on the electronic When adjusting the driver’s seat, keep Battery key the shoulders resting firmly against the backrest, and the wrists within reach of Proceed as follows to unlock the doors if Push the unlock button on the door the top of the steering wheel. The driver the vehicle battery is discharged. panel must also be able to fully press the brake Rear Doors And Passenger Door Unlock driver’s door lock with the pedal. 1. With the doors unlocked insert the emergency key emergency key from the key fob or a flat Operate the internal door handle Warning! bladed screwdriver into the door lock Note: For the rear doors, if the Child manual release lock cylinder. Safety Locks are engaged, and the previously described locking procedure is It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, carried out, operating the internal handle inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, will not open the door. Instead, it will only people riding in these areas are more likely realign the lock release device. To open to be seriously injured or killed. the door, the outside handle must be Do not allow people to ride in any area of used. The door central locking/unlocking your vehicle that is not equipped with seats buttons are not deactivated when the and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in emergency lock is engaged. these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a 04056S0008EM seat and using a seat belt properly. Door Lock Manual Release Lock Cylinder Front Seats 2. Turn the manual release lock cylinder The front seats can be adjusted to ensure clockwise for the right door locks or maximum comfort for the occupants. counterclockwise for the left door locks. When adjusting the driver’s seat, keep 3. Remove the key/screwdriver from the the shoulders resting firmly against the manual release lock. backrest, and the wrists within reach of the top of the steering wheel. The driver must also be able to fully press the brake pedal. 25 Warning!

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously 04066S0002EM 04066S0003EM injured or killed. Manual Seat Adjustment Power Seat Adjustment Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a 1 — Adjustment Lever 1 — Seat Switch (Forward/Rearward/ seat and using a seat belt properly. 2 — Height Adjustment Button Height) 3 — Recline Lever 2 — Seatback Switch 3 — Lumbar Adjustment Sparco Racing Seats — If Equipped Forward/Rearward Adjustment Height Adjustment The adjustment lever is at the front of the Push the height adjustment button upwards or downwards to obtain your Caution! GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE seat, near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward. desired height. Release the bar once the seat is in the Seatback Recline Do not place any article under a power seat position desired. Using body pressure, To adjust the seatback, lift the recline or impede its ability to move as it may cause move forward and rearward on the seat lever located on the outboard side of the damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may to be sure that the seat adjusters have seat, lean back to the desired position become limited if movement is stopped by an latched. and release the lever. To return the obstruction in the seat's path. seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever. Forward/Rearward Adjustment Power Seats — If Equipped Push the seat switch forward or rearward On models equipped with power seats, to adjust to your desired position. the switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver's seat up, down, forward, and rearward, or to recline the seatback. 26 Seatback Recline Power Bolster Adjustment you want to assign the set position to for The angle of the seatback can be Push the power bolster adjustment 1.5 seconds. When a new seat position is adjusted forward or rearward. Push the buttons to regulate the width of the memorized, the previously memorized seatback switch forward or rearward, backrest through the lateral padding. position on the same button is and the seat will move in the direction of automatically overwritten. Recalling a the switch. Release the switch when the memorized position is also possible for desired position is reached. approximately three minutes after the doors are opened and approximately one Power Lumbar — If Equipped minute after the engine is stopped. To Vehicles equipped with power driver or recall a memorized position, push the passenger seats may also be equipped relevant button briefly. with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward Warning! or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward 04066S0015EM or downward to raise or lower the lumbar Seatback Width Adjustment Adjusting a seat while driving may be support. dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could 4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons result in loss of control which could cause a Height Adjustment 5 — Driver Memory Seat Buttons collision and serious injury or death. The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push Seats should be adjusted before Driver Memory Seat fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle downward on the seat switch, and the The driver memory seat buttons can is parked. Serious injury or death could result seat will move in the direction of the store and recall three different driver’s from a poorly adjusted seat belt. switch. Release the switch when the seat positions as well as outside power desired position is reached. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so mirror positions. Storing and recalling is that the shoulder belt is no longer resting Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting) possible with the ignition in the ON or against your chest. In a collision you could The seat angle can be adjusted in four STOP positions and the driver’s side door slide under the seat belt, which could result in directions. Lift or push the front part of closed, or for three minutes after having serious injury or death. seat switch to move the front part of the opened the driver's side door. The seat in the corresponding direction. performed position memory is confirmed Heated Seats Release the seat switch when the seat by a beep. To set a memory profile, first With the engine in the ON position, push has reached the desired position. adjust your seat (and power mirror the driver or passenger heated seat position if desired) with the various button located on the instrument controls until you are in the desired panel. position. Then, push the specific button 27 automatically lowers to reach the normal Rear Seats temperature level for the “maximum” The rear seats allow for three setting. passengers. The “minimum” setting is automatically Note: Because the rear seat is designed deactivated once a certain period of time as a 4+1 seat, the middle seat is of has elapsed. This varies on a limited use. It is recommended that this case-by-case basis, in accordance with seat only be used by a person who can the specific operating conditions. use the backrest as a substitute for the To lower the heat level, each quick push head restraint. of the switch will decrease by one level

04066S0004EM until it is off. Holding the switch down at Heated Seat Buttons any of the three levels for 1-2 seconds will deactivate the heated seat. Youcan select three heating levels: Note: To preserve the battery charge, Minimum — one orange indicator this function cannot be activated when illuminated on the buttons the engine is off. Average — two orange indicators illuminated on the buttons Warning! Maximum — three orange indicators 04066S0006EM GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE illuminated on the buttons Rear Seat After selecting a heating level, heat will Persons who are unable to feel pain to the be felt within a few minutes. skin because of advanced age, chronic The seats and the seatbelts are A quick push of the heated seat button illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, considered as components of the medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other will select the heat levels in order of protection system for the vehicle's physical condition must exercise care when occupants. lowest to highest. Or, holding the switch using the seat heater. It may cause burns down from either “off” or the minimum even at low temperatures, especially if used Note: Refer to the "Seat Belt Systems" level for 1–2 seconds will automatically for long periods of time in "Safety" for further information. select the maximum heat level. Do not place anything on the seat or When the heated seat function is not seatback that insulates against heat, such active, pushing and holding the desired as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the heated seat button for 1–2 seconds will seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat activate the “fast maximum heating” that has been overheated could cause function. The heater produces a boosted serious burns due to the increased surface heat level for the first few minutes of temperature of the seat. operation. After this, the heat 28 HEAD RESTRAINTS the upper structure of the seatbacks and Rear Head Restraints (Adjustments) are intended to help protect you and the Head restraints are designed to reduce passenger from neck injury. the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Adjust the seatbacks to their upright, Warning! Head restraints should be adjusted so on-road positions so that the head that the top of the head restraint is restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of your head. All occupants, including the driver, should located above the top of your ear. not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat Front Head Restraints (Adjustments) until the head restraints are placed in their — If Equipped proper positions in order to minimize the risk Warning! of neck injury in the event of a crash. The front head restraints may be height-adjustable. To adjust them, Head restraints should never be adjusted A loose head restraint thrown forward in operate as follows: while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a a collision or hard stop could cause serious Upward adjustment: Raise the head vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. restraint until it clicks into place. Always securely stow removed head injury or death in the event of a collision. restraints in a location outside the occupant Downward adjustment: Push button and lower the head restraint. compartment. The height of the outboard head ALL the head restraints MUST be restraints can be adjusted. The head reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect restraint of the center seat, if equipped, the occupants. Follow the re-installation Warning! cannot be adjusted, only removed. instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. For upward adjustment, pull up on the All occupants, including the driver, should head restraint until it clicks into place. Do not place items over the top of the not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat For downward adjustment, push in the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat until the head restraints are placed in their covers or portable DVD players. These items adjustment button and lower the head proper positions in order to minimize the risk may interfere with the operation of the restraint while holding the button to the of neck injury in the event of a crash. Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a desired height. collision and could result in serious injury or Head restraints should never be adjusted death. while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious Racing Seat Head Restraints injury or death in the event of a collision. Yourvehicle may be equipped with non-adjustable head restraints on the Note: To allow maximum visibility for the driver's and passenger's seatbacks. driver, if the head restraints are not used, The non-adjustable head restraints lower the head restraints to the fully consist of a trimmed foam covering over down position. 29 To reinstall the head restraints, proceed STEERING WHEEL as follows: Adjustments 1. Hold down both the adjustment This feature allows you to tilt the button and release button while placing steering column upward or downward. It the head restraint post into the holes. also allows you to lengthen or shorten the 2. Then, reposition the head restraint to steering column. The tilt/telescoping the appropriate height for the lever is located below the steering wheel passengers. at the end of the steering column.

04076S0002EM Warning! Rear Head Restraint 1 — Adjustment Button 2 — Release Button A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Note: To allow maximum visibility for the Always securely stow removed head driver, if the head restraints are not in restraints in a location outside the occupant use, lower the head restraints to the fully compartment. down position. ALL the head restraints MUST be

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect Head Restraints (Removal) the occupants. Follow the re-installation To remove the head restraints, proceed instructions above prior to operating the as follows: vehicle or occupying a seat. 1. Raise the head restraints to their maximum height. 2. Push the adjustment button and the release button at the side of the two supports.

3. Remove the head restraints by pulling 04086S0001EM them upwards. Steering Wheel Adjustment 1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle A — Open B — Closed 30 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped Do not place anything on the steering Warning! With the ignition in the ON position, push wheel that insulates against heat, such as a the heated steering wheel button on blanket or steering wheel covers of any type the instrument panel. and material. This may cause the steering Do not adjust the steering column while wheel heater to overheat. driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

To Adjust The Position: 1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle down to the open position. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the 04086S0002EM Heated Steering Wheel Button desired position. When the function is enabled, the 3. Lock the desired position by pushing indicator on the button will illuminate. the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle to the closed position. Note: If this function is activated with the engine stopped, the battery may run down. Warning! Warning! It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any after-market operation involving steering system or steering column modifications Persons who are unable to feel pain to the (e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that skin because of advanced age, chronic could adversely affect performance. Doing illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, so could void the New Vehicle Limited medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other Warrant, cause SERIOUS SAFETY physical conditions must exercise care when PROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY,and also using the steering wheel heater. It may cause result in the vehicle not meeting burns even at low temperatures, especially if type-approval requirements. used for long periods.

31 MIRRORS If the power mirror control knob is moved again during door mirror folding (from Electrochromic Mirror closed to open position and vice versa), This mirror automatically adjusts for the movement direction is reversed. headlight glare from vehicles behind you. Automatic Activation The electrochromic mirror has a power Activating the central door locking button to activate/deactivate the system from outside the vehicle automatic dimming/anti-glaring function. automatically folds the mirrors. The mirrors return to the driving position when the ignition is cycled to the ON

04106S0004EM position. Power Mirror Control If the door mirrors were folded using the 1 — Power Mirror Control Knob power mirror control knob, they can only A — Left be returned to the driving position by B — Right rotating the knob again. C — Power Folding Position Note: The power folding operation can D — Neutral be enabled only when the vehicle speed is lower than 31 mph (50 km/h). They can only be manually controlled up to that 04106S0002EM To adjust the selected mirror, push the Electrochromic Mirror Power Button knob in the direction desired. speed. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Note: Once adjustment is complete, Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If automatic dimming feature is rotate the knob to the neutral position to Equipped deactivated. prevent accidental movements. Like the electrochromic mirror, an Power Folding automatic dimming feature is also Outside Power Mirrors available on the outside rear view mirrors With the power mirror control knob in the Power Adjustment to prevent glare. The automatic dimming neutral position, move it to the power The power mirrors can be adjusted with button is the same for all rear view folding position. Move the knob again to mirrors. the ignition ON. return the mirrors to the driving position. Select the desired mirror using the power mirror control.

32 EXTERIOR LIGHTS The exterior lights can be activated only when the ignition is in the ON position, Warning! Headlight Switch except for the parking lights. Refer to The headlight switch is located to the left "Parking Lights" in this section for more Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside of the steering wheel on the instrument information. convex mirror will look smaller and farther panel. This switch controls the operation The instrument panel and the various away than they really are. Relying too much of the headlights, parking lights, controls on the dashboard will be on side convex mirrors could cause you to instrument panel lights, instrument panel illuminated when the exterior lights are collide with another vehicle or other object. light dimming, interior lights and rear fog turned on. Use your inside mirror when judging the size lights. or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex In addition, there are buttons for parking Automatic Headlights mirror. sensors deactivation and stop/start. This system automatically turns the Refer to “Starting And Operating” for headlights on or off according to ambient Heated Mirrors further information. light levels. Push the rear defrost button in the Function Activation climate controls to activate the heated From the O (OFF) position, turn the light mirrors. switch to the (AUTO) position. Note: The function can only operate with the ignition position cycled to ON. Function Deactivation To deactivate the function, turn the light switch to a position other than the (AUTO) position. 04126S0001NA Headlight Switch Daytime Running Lights (DRL) With the ignition in the ON mode and the 1 — Parking Sensors Deactivation But- light switch turned to the position, if ton the dusk sensor detects sufficient 2 — Parking Light, Daylight Running external light, the Daytime Running Lights, Headlight Switch Lights will turn on automatically while the 3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer other lights remain off. 4 — Rear Fog Light Button If the turn signals are operated, the 5 — Stop/Start Button brightness of the corresponding Daytime Running Lights will be decreased as long as the turn signals are on. 33 If equipped, the DRL can be To leave only the lights on one side Function Deactivation activated/deactivated from the (right/left) illuminated, you must move This function is deactivated by turning on Information and Entertainment System, the multifunction lever (located on the the headlights, the side lights, or by by selecting the following functions in left side of the steering wheel) to the side cycling the ignition to ON. sequence on the main MENU: that you want to remain on. With the parking lights on, the warning light on High Beam Headlights 1. “Settings.” the instrument panel will come on. To activate the fixed high beam 2. “Lights.” Note: Placing the ignition to ON turns off headlights, push the multifunction lever, the parking lights, which were only located on the left side of the steering 3. Daytime Running Lights.” illuminated on one side. wheel, towards the instrument panel. The headlight switch must be turned to the Note: The Daytime Running Lights Headlight Off Delay (AUTO) or (ON) position. cannot be deactivated in Canadian markets. The “Headlight Off Delay” function delays With high beam headlights on, the the switching off of the headlights after High Beam Indicator on the Rear Fog Light the vehicle has been stopped. instrument panel will illuminate. The rear fog light switch is integrated The function can be activated from the with the headlight switch. Information and Entertainment System Push the button to turn the rear fog by selecting the following functions in lights on/off. sequence on the main menu: The rear fog lights turn on only when the 1. “Settings.” GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE headlights or parking lights are turned on. The lights can be turned off by pushing 2. “Lights.” the button again or by turning the 3. “Headlight Off Delay.” headlight switch to the O (off) position. The side lights and the headlights stay on When the engine is stopped with the rear for a time that can be set between 30, fog lights on, they will remain off the next 04126S0020EM 60, and 90 seconds. Multifunction Lever time the engine is started. Function Activation The high beam headlights are turned off Parking Lights With the headlights on, place the ignition by pulling the lever to its original position. With the ignition in the STOP position, to the STOP position and the timer will The warning light/icon will turn off in turn the headlight switch to the then start. the instrument panel when the headlights position to turn the parking lights on. Note: To activate this function, the are turned off. All of the parking lights will turn on for headlights must be deactivated within eight minutes, and opening the door two minutes after the ignition has been activates an audible warning. cycled to the STOP position. 34 Flashing The Headlights If the high beam headlights are operated “Lane Change” Function Pulling the multifunction lever toward the quickly again (pushing the multifunction Tap the lever up or down once, without steering wheel will activate the high lever towards the instrument panel), the moving beyond the detent, and the turn beam headlights manually. The lights will warning light/icon will illuminate in the signal (right or left) will flash five times. remain on as long as the lever is held. instrument panel, and the main beam Then, the turn signal (right or left) will Once the lever is released, the lights will headlights will turn on constantly until automatically turn off. resume the previous position. the speed exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h). To turn off the flashing before the end of When the speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is Automatic High Beam Headlights — If the cycle, move the lever in the opposite exceeded again, the automatic Equipped direction until the first click (about half functioning is reactivated. way). The Automatic High Beam Headlights If the multifunction lever is pushed again system provides increased forward Static Bending Light Function (SBL) — with the Automatic High Beam lighting at night by automating high beam If Equipped Headlights activated, the Automatic High control through the use of a digital Beam Headlights function deactivates. The SBL function utilizes Light Emitting camera mounted on the windshield. This Diodes (LEDs) in order to better To deactivate the automatic headlight camera detects vehicle specific light and illuminate the street and increase the function, rotate the headlight switch to automatically switches from high beams light angle while turning. This function is the position. to low beams until the approaching enabled by rotating the light switch to vehicle is out of view. Note: If the system recognizes heavy position or (AUTO). The SBL LEDs This function is enabled with the traffic areas, the automatic functions activate when the speed is below 25 mph Information and Entertainment System, remain disabled independently of the (40 km/h). vehicle’s speed. and can only be activated with the light This function can be activated/ switch turned to (AUTO). Turn Signals deactivated on the Information and If the high beam headlights are on, the To activate the turn signals function, Entertainment System by selecting the blue icon/warning light will illuminate move the multifunction lever, located on following functions in sequence on the in the instrument panel. the left side of the steering wheel, up or main menu: When the speed is higher than 37 mph down until it reaches the detent. Moving 1. “Settings.” (60 km/h) and the function is active, the the lever upward flashes the right turn lights will turn off if the multifunction signal and moving the lever downward 2. “Lights.” lever is pushed again. will flash the left turn signal. 3. “Cornering Lights.” When the speed is lower than 15 mph The or turn signal will blink on the (25 km/h) and the function is active, the instrument panel. function switches the high beam The turn signals turn off automatically headlights off. when the vehicle is brought back onto a straight course.

35 INTERIOR LIGHTS being drained once the doors are closed. The interior lights will turn off after If a light is left on accidently, the 15 minutes to preserve the battery. Front Map Reading Lights overhead lights turn off automatically Timing While Getting Out Of The The front map/reading and overhead approximately 15 minutes after the Vehicle — After cycling the ignition to lights are mounted in the overhead engine has been turned OFF. STOP,the overhead lights will turn on as console. Each light can be turned on by Overhead Light Timing — If Equipped follows: pushing the corresponding switch on the console. These switches are backlit for On certain models, to assist getting in For a few seconds after the engine night time visibility. To turn the lights off, and out of the vehicle at night or in stops. poorly-lit areas, two timed modes have push the switch a second time. For approximately three minutes when been provided. one of the doors is opened. Timing While Getting Into The Vehicle — The overhead lights turn on For a few seconds when the last door according to the following modes: is closed. The timing stops automatically when the Will illuminate for a few seconds when doors are locked. the doors are unlocked. Vanity Mirror Lights — If Equipped Will illuminate for approximately three minutes when one of the doors is opened. On the driver and passenger sun visor, there is a light which illuminates the sun Will illuminate for a few seconds when visor mirror when folded down.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE the doors are locked. 04136S0001EM Overhead Console Timing is interrupted when the ignition is cycled to ON. 1 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light Switch Three Modes Are Provided For 2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch Switching Off: 3 — Overhead Lights Switch 4 — Front Map Reading Lights Switch When all doors are closed after 5 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light entering the vehicle, the three-minute Switch timer will stop and a seconds timer will 6 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light start for the interior lights. This timing 7 — Center Reading/Map Light will stop when the ignition is cycled to 8 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light ON. 04136S0002EM Sun Visor Mirror When doors are locked (either with key Note: Before getting out of the vehicle, fob or with key inserted on driver side 1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover ensure that the overhead lights are off. door), the overhead light turns off. This will prevent the battery level from 36 The courtesy light turns on automatically 3. "Lights." by lifting the cover. The lights can be adjusted to seven Glove Compartment Light different levels of brightness. This light turns on automatically when the Door Light glove compartment is opened and turns This vehicle is equipped with door off when it is closed. courtesy lamps that illuminate the entry The light turns on and off regardless of way for the driver or passenger when the the ignition status. door is opened, and turns off when it is closed.

The light turns on and off regardless of 04136S0005EM the ignition status. Exterior Door Handle Light Rear Overhead Light The rear overhead light buttons are activated or deactivated by two on/off switches on the front map reading lights.

04136S0003EM Glove Compartment Light Interior Ambient Lighting The brightness of the interior passenger 04136S0007EM compartment lights can be adjusted via Door Light the Information and Entertainment On vehicles equipped with a "Passive System. Entry" system, another light can be found To access the adjustment function, on the under each exterior door handle. main menu select the following items in 04136S0004EM sequence: Rear Overhead Light 1. "Settings." 1 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light 2 — Driver Rear Overhead Light 2. "Interior Ambient Lighting." 3 — Driver Rear Overhead Light Switch 4 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light Switch

37 The light turns on when a door is opened. Instrument Panel Dimmer Control WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note: The light will turn off With the daytime running lights or Windshield Wiper Stalk automatically after a few minutes if a headlights on, rotate the dimmer control door is left open. To turn it on again, open upward to increase the instrument panel The windshield wiper stalk is located on another door or close and reopen the brightness and the control button icons. the right side of the steering wheel. same door. Rotate the dimmer control downward to The windshield wipers will only operate Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights decrease brightness. with the ignition cycled to ON. The luggage compartment features two courtesy lights. Caution! These courtesy lights turn on automatically when the trunk is opened Turn the windshield wipers off when and turn off when it is closed. driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off. In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the 04126S0055EM “Park” position before turning off the engine. Dimmer Control If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted. Always remove any buildup of snow that 04136S0006EM Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the The courtesy lights will turn on and off windshield wiper control is turned off and the regardless of the position of the ignition blades cannot return to the off position, switch. damage to the wiper motor may occur. Note: If the trunk is left open, the lights will automatically turn off after 15 minutes to preserve battery life.

38 Windshield Wiper/Washers Rain Sensors Note: This function does not activate the Rotating the switch to the position, windshield washer. To spray windshield activates the first, less sensitive level of washer fluid onto the windshield, the the Rain Sensing function. washing function must be used. Rotating the switch to the position, activates the second, more sensitive level of the Rain Sensing function. Refer Warning! to “Rain Sensor” in this section for more information on how this system functions. Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You Windshield Washer Operation might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the 04146S0001EM Pull the stalk toward the steering wheel Windshield Wiper Switch to operate the windshield washer. windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and Operation: The switch on the wiper Keep the stalk pulled to activate both the during windshield washer use. stalk can be set to the following windshield washer jet and the windshield positions: wiper with a single movement. The wipers and washers will continue to operate until Rain Sensor Windshield Wiper Off. you let go of the stalk. The Rain Sensor is located behind the Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing. The windshield wiper stops working three interior rear view mirror. This feature High Sensitivity Rain Sensing. strokes after the stalk is released, senses moisture on the windshield and Low Continuous Wiper Speed. followed by a final stroke six seconds automatically activates the wipers for High Continuous Wiper Speed. later to complete the cycle. the driver. Windshield Wiper Operation Mist Rotating the switch to the position Use this feature when weather activates the first (low) level continuous conditions make occasional usage of the speed of the windshield wipers in manual wipers necessary. Push the stalk upward mode. to the MIST position and release for a Rotating the switch to the position single wiping cycle. This function is useful activates the second (high) level to remove small deposits of dust from continuous speed of the windshield the windshield or morning dew. wipers in manual mode.

04146S0002EM Rain Sensor 39 The feature is especially useful for road Deactivation The sensor continues to operate and it is splash or over spray from the windshield Use the wiper switch or cycle the ignition possible to set the windshield wiper to washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the to STOP. continuous mode or . The failure end of the multifunction lever to one of If the ignition is cycled to the STOP indication remains on for as long as the four settings to activate this feature. position and the wiper switch is left in sensor is active. The sensor has an adjustment range that or position, no wiping cycle will The rain sensor is able to recognize and varies progressively from wiper still (no occur even if it rains when the vehicle is automatically adjust itself in the stroke) when the windshield is dry, to next started (ignition at ON). presence of the following conditions: wiper at continuous speed (fast This prevents accidental activation of the Presence of dirt on the controlled operation) with intense rain. rain sensor when the engine is started surface (e.g. salt, dirt, etc.). Activation (e.g. when the windshield is being washed by hand or the wipers are stuck to the Presence of streaks of water caused Rotating the wiper switch to position by the worn window wiper blades. or activates the rain sensor. windshield by ice). The activation of the rain sensor system Youcan restore the automatic Difference between day and night. is done by tapping the wiper stalk functioning of the rain sensor by tapping upwards while the switch is in the or the wiper stalk upwards once the vehicle position. has been restarted. The variation in sensitivity during rain When the rain sensor is reactivated using sensor operation is also signaled by a any of the functions described above, reactivation is indicated by a single tap of

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE stroke of the wiper (command acquired and implemented). This stroke is also the windshield wipers, regardless of the executed with the windshield dry. condition of the windshield. If the windshield washer is used with the In the event of malfunction of the rain rain sensor activated, the normal washing sensor while it is active, the windshield cycle is performed, after which the rain wiper operates intermittently at a speed sensor resumes its normal automatic consistent with the sensitivity setting of operation. the rain sensor, whether or not there is rain on the glass for as long as the sensor Note: Keep the glass in the sensor area failure is indicated on the display. clean.

40 CLIMATE CONTROL Central Air Vents Rear Air Vents To adjust the position of the Central To adjust the position of the Rear Air Passenger Compartment Air Vents Air Vents, move the Central Air Vent Vents, move the Rear Air Vent Adjuster Side Air Vents Adjuster (2) up or down. (2) in any direction. To adjust the position of the Side Air Rotate the Central Air Vent Air Flow Rotate the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2) Vents, move the Side Air Vent Adjuster Adjuster (3) to adjust the air flow. to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Rear (2) in any direction. Rotating Central Air Vent Air Flow Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close Rotate the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2) Adjuster (3) up will open the vents, the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Side allowing for maximum airflow. Rotating it will open the vent. Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close down will close the vents. the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise will open the vent.

04156S0004EM

04156S0003EM Rear Air Vents Central Air Vents 1 — Adjustable Rear Air Vents 04156S0002EM 1 — Adjustable Central Air Vents 2 — Rear Air Vent Adjuster Side Air Vents 2 — Central Air Vent Adjuster 1 — Demister Air Vents 3 — Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster 2 — Side Air Vent Adjuster 4 — Windshield Front Defroster Vent

41 Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System Controls

04156S0005EM

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Climate Control System 1. Driver Temperature Adjustment Knob 6. Rear Defrost Button 11. Passenger Heated Seat Button — If Equipped 2. Driver Side AUTO Button (Automatic 7. Passenger Side Air Distribution Selec- 12. Air Conditioning On/Off Button Operation) tion Button 3. Driver Side Air Distribution Selection 8. Passenger Side AUTO Button (Automa- 13. Steering Wheel Heater Button — If Button tic Operation) Equipped 4. Front Defrost Button (Rapid Defrosting) 9. Passenger Temperature Adjustment 14. Driver Side Heated Seat Button — If Knob Equipped 5. Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 10. SYNC Button – Sets Temperature Ali- 15. Air Recirculation Button gnment Between Driver & Passenger Side

42 Compressor variations (for Air recirculation Caution! cooling/dehumidifying the air) Rear Defroster Air recirculation System deactivation The Climate Control System can also be Operating Mode The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, which operated manually by using the buttons does not pollute the environment in the event and knobs on the faceplate. The Climate Control system can be of accidental leakage. Under no Manual selections will override the activated in different ways. It is circumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids, recommended to use the automatic which are incompatible with the components automatic settings, which are stored until of this system. the AUTO button is pushed. If the system function. Push the AUTO button and set intervenes for safety reasons, the the desired temperatures. The automatic system adjusts the Description automatic setting will take control of the system. temperature, quantity, and distribution The Automatic Dual Zone Climate The below operations will not deactivate of air introduced into the passenger Control System adjusts the temperature the automatic (AUTO) function: compartment. It also controls air and air distribution independently Air Recirculation activation/ recirculation and the activation of the air conditioner. between the driver and passenger. deactivation The system maintains the set A/C activation/deactivation At any time during automatic operation, you can change the temperature, activate temperature inside the passenger SYNC function activation compartment and compensates for or deactivate the Rear Defroster, Rear Window Defrost activation/ outside temperature change. activate SYNC, activate or deactivate deactivation Note: The reference temperature is the air conditioner, and activate or 72 °F (22 °C) for optimal comfort When in AUTO mode, the vehicle’s deactivate air recirculation. The system management. internal temperature is controlled will automatically adjust to the new according to the set temperature. settings. The automatic setting will adjust the following to maintain comfort within the The following can be manually set or Climate Control Display Settings passenger compartment: adjusted: The Climate Control settings are visible Air temperature from the driver/front Driver/passenger air temperature Blower speed (continuous variation) on the Information and Entertainment passenger side vents System radio screen. Air distribution from the driver/front Air distribution (seven positions for The display on the Information and passenger side vents driver and passenger) A/C activation Entertainment System is a pop up Fan speed (continuous variation of the window (1), which is activated by pushing Front Defroster air flow) the buttons or turning the knobs on the Climate Control system. The indicator lights located on the number of buttons and knobs indicate that the selected 43 feature is on/off. If no operation is Adjustment Knob to the desired Air flow distribution between the performed for a predetermined time, the temperature. windshield demisting/defrosting pop-up will close on the display. Rear passengers’ temperature is linked vents, and side/central dashboard to driver side selection. vents. This distribution setting Air Distribution Selection sends air to the windshield in sunny Push the Air Distribution Selection conditions. button on the faceplate to change the Air flow distribution to all vents on mode of air distribution. the vehicle. Air flow to the windshield and In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls demister window vents to automatically manage the air demist/defrost them. distribution. When set manually, the respective symbols on the Information 04156S0006EM Air flow at the central and side and Entertainment System indicate the 1 — Climate Control Pop-up Display dashboard vents to ventilate the air distribution setting. chest and the face. Air Temperature Adjustment Fan Speed Adjustment Air flow to the front and rear floor Rotate the driver or passenger Turn the Blower Speed Knob to increase Temperature Adjustment Knob clockwise vents. This setting heats the or decrease the blower speed. The speed for warmer temperatures or passenger compartment the is displayed with lighted indicators in the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE counterclockwise for cooler quickest. Information and Entertainment System temperatures. The set temperatures are Air flow distributed between the display. shown on the Information and Maximum fan speed = all indicators floor vents (hotter air) and the Entertainment System. illuminated on the Information and central and side dashboard vents Push the SYNC button to sync the driver Entertainment System display (cooler air). This air distribution and passenger air temperatures. Minimum fan speed = one indicator setting is useful on sunny days Rotate the passenger Temperature illuminated on the Information and during spring and autumn. Adjustment Knob to cancel the SYNC Entertainment System display function. This will set a new passenger Air flow distributed between the side temperature. The fan can be turned off by rotating the floor vents, windshield, and front Blower Speed Knob counterclockwise to Rotate the Temperature Adjustment side window defrosting/demisting position O (all segments on the Knob fully clockwise to engage the HI vents. This distribution setting Information and Entertainment System (maximum heating) setting or fully warms the passenger compartment display are turned off). counterclockwise to engage the LO (maximum cooling) setting. To deactivate while preventing the windows from Note: To restore automatic control of these functions, rotate the Temperature fogging up. the fan speed, push the AUTO button. 44 AUTO Button Air Recirculation And Air Quality Note: System (AQS) When the AUTO button is pushed With the AQS function active and (indicator illuminated), the Climate Air Recirculation is managed according to after the internal air recirculation Control system automatically adjusts the the following operating mode: system has been functioning for a set following settings: Automatic engagement: indicator is amount of time, the Climate Control Quantity and distribution of air flow in illuminated above the “A”on the Air System enables air intake to cycle the the passenger compartment Recirculation Button air in the passenger compartment for a The air conditioner Forced activation (air circulation set time. The AQS function is disabled Air recirculation always activated): indicator illuminated during the air changes. Cancels any manual settings above the icon on the Air The engagement of the recirculation Selecting the AUTO function illuminates Recirculation Button system makes it possible to reach the the indicator on the A/C button . Forced deactivation (air recirculation required heating or cooling conditions If air distribution or the fan speed is always off with intake of outside air): faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use manual adjusted, the AUTO button both indicators not illuminated on the Air it on rainy/cold days as it can increase the possibility of the windows fogging. indicator will turn off to indicate that the Recirculation Button When the outside temperature is low, Climate Control system is no longer in The three operating conditions are AUTO mode. recirculation is forced off to prevent the obtained by pushing the Air Recirculation windows from fogging up. After a manual adjustment, push the Button in sequence. AUTO button to resume the automatic A/C Compressor system. Enabling The Air Quality System (AQS) Function — If Equipped Push the A/C button to activate or deactivate the A/C compressor (indicator SYNC Button When the automatic recirculation illuminated when activated). The A/C function is selected, the AQS function Push the SYNC button (indicator compressor will remain off even after the automatically activates internal air illuminated) to sync the passenger side engine has stopped. air temperature with the driver side air recirculation when the outside air is temperature. polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and tunnels). When the A/C compressor is turned off, the system deactivates air recirculation At low external temperatures or in high This function makes temperature to prevent the windows from fogging up. humidity, the automatic function turns regulation easier when the driver is If the climate control system can off to avoid fogging up the windows. The traveling alone. maintain the temperature, with the A/C user can select the function again by Turn the passenger Temperature turned off, the AUTO feature will remain pushing the Air Recirculation Button. Adjustment Knob or push the passenger on and the AUTO button indicator light side Air Distribution Selection Button to In automatic operation, air recirculation will not switch off. will be controlled by the system change the passenger side air To restore automatic control of the A/C according to outside environmental temperature and return to separate air compressor, push the A/C button or conditions. temperature management. the AUTO button. With the A/C 45 compressor off, the air speed can be set Note: The MAX-DEF function remains Switching Off/On The Climate Control manually using the Air Speed Adjustment active for approximately three minutes System Knob. once the engine coolant reaches the Switching Off The Climate Control proper temperature. When the A/C compressor is on, and the System engine is running, air speed cannot be When the function is on, AUTO mode will Rotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knob lower than the minimum speed (only one deactivate. The only manual operations completely counterclockwise to turn off indicator light is lit). possible are adjusting blower speed and the Climate Control System. Note: When the A/C is off the Climate turning off the Rear Window Defroster. With the air conditioner off: Control system can not produce air that Pushing the button switches off the Air recirculation is on is colder than the current outside MAX-DEF function. temperature. Under certain The A/C compressor is off Rear Defroster environmental conditions, windows could The fan is off fog up rapidly, since the air is not Push the Rear Defroster button to The heated rear window can be dehumidified. activate (indicators illuminated) the Rear activated/deactivated Defroster. Front Defroster And MAX-DEF Note: The climate control system stores Function The Rear Defroster will turn off after the previously set temperatures and 20 minutes or once the engine is turned resumes operation when any button on Push the Front Defroster button off. To reactive the Rear Defroster, push the system is pushed. (indicator illuminated) to defrost the the Rear Defroster button. windshield and side windows. Switching On The Climate Control Note: To avoid damage, do not apply System GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE While in MAX-DEF function, the air stickers over the interior heating To switch the climate control system on conditioner will: filaments of the Rear Defroster. Activate the air conditioner in automatic mode, push the AUTO compressor when the weather allows Humidity Sensor button. Turn air recirculation off The Humidity Sensor helps to prevent the Stop/Start windows from fogging up. The AUTO Set the maximum air temperature (HI) The climate control system manages the function (indicator illuminated) must be on both the driver and passenger side Stop/Start system. Stop/Start has the on for the Humidity Sensor to function. Activate a blower speed based on the engine shut off when vehicle speed is temperature of the engine coolant When outside temperature is low, the 0 mph (0 km/h) to maintain comfort Adjust the air flow towards the system may turn the compressor on and within the vehicle. windshield and front side windows turn air recirculation off for safer driving. Activate the Rear Window Defroster Display the fan speed (indicators illuminated) and current air distribution setting 46 Stop/Start will deactivate in the Note: POWER WINDOWS following scenarios: In harsh climate conditions, limit the The climate control system is in AUTO Power Window Switches use of the Stop/Start system to prevent mode (indicator illuminated), and the the compressor from continuously The power window switches work with vehicle has yet to reach the set switching on and off. This will cause the ignition in the ON position and for temperature rapid misting of the windows and the three minutes after the ignition has been The climate control system is in LO accumulation of humidity in the placed in the STOP position. When one of maximum cooling passenger compartment. the front doors is opened, this operation is disabled. The climate control system is in HI When the Stop/Start system is on, Driver Side Front Door Controls maximum heating the climate control system will always The switches are located on the door The climate control system is in the take air in from outside, reducing the panel trim. All windows can be controlled MAX-DEF status probability of the windows fogging up. from the driver side door panel. When the Stop/Start system is active, Additional Heater — If Equipped the engine will restart if the inside Note: The additional heater temperature changes significantly, or if automatically operates if the outside the LO setting, or MAX-DEF setting, is temperature and engine coolant activated. temperature are low. The heater will not With Stop/Start system on, air flow is operate if battery voltage is low. reduced to keep the compartment comfort conditions for longer. System Maintenance Until the temperature drastically In winter, the Climate Control System changes within the cabin, the climate must be turned on at least once a month control system will continue to maintain for approximately ten minutes. the temperature while the engine is off. 04166S0001EM Have the system inspected at an Power Window Switches By deactivating the Stop/Start system authorized dealer before the summer. with the button located on the 1 — Front Left 4 — Window dashboard, the climate control system Window Switch Lockout Switch will take priority over the engine shutting 2 — Front Right 5 — Rear Left off. Window Switch Window Switch 3 — Rear Right Window Switch

47 Window Opening This device is also useful if the windows Power Window System Initialization Briefly push the window switch once to are activated accidentally by children If power supply is interrupted, the move the window downward. inside the vehicle. electric window automatic operation Push the switch a second time to activate The anti-pinch safety function is must be initialized once more. the automatic operation. activated both during the manual and the The initialization procedure described Pushing the switch a third time will stop automatic operation of the window. below must be carried out for each door the window in the desired position. When the anti-pinch system is activated, (with the doors closed): Window Closing the window closing is immediately interrupted. Then the window closing is 1. Fully close the window to be Pull the window switch up to move the automatically reversed and the window initialized, with manual operation. window upward. Hold the switch for at lowers by about eight inches (20 cm) in 2. After the window has been closed, least half of a second and the window will relation to the first stop position. The go up automatically. hold the up switch for at least three window cannot be operated during this seconds. To stop the window during Auto-Up time. operation, push or pull the window switch Note: In the event of an error, or if the again. anti-pinch protection is activated three Warning! Passenger Side Front Door/Rear Door consecutive times, the automatic closing Controls operation of the window will be Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, There are single window controls on the deactivated. In order to restore the and do not let children play with power passenger and rear door trim panels correct operation of the system, the windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE which operate the door windows. window must be lowered. the vehicle, or in a location accessible to Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch children. Occupants, particularly unattended Protection children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window The vehicle may be equipped with an switches. Such entrapment may result in anti-pinch safety device for closing the serious injury or death. windows. If the safety system senses any obstacle while the window is closing, it will stop the window’s movement and reverse it, depending on its position.

48 HOOD Closing Opening As the hood is extremely light, to close the hood, lower it to approximately To open the hood, proceed as follows: 16 inches (40 cm) from the engine 1. Pull the release lever located on the compartment then apply a slight driver’s side kick panel. pressure downward and drop the hood. Make sure that the hood is completely closed and fully latched. If it is not perfectly closed, do not try to push the hood down but open it and repeat the

04196S0002EM procedure Lift Under Hood Latch Up Then Left Note: Always check that the hood is 5. Raise the hood completely. The closed correctly to prevent it from operation is assisted by the addition of opening while the vehicle is travelling. two gas props which hold it in the open Since the hood is equipped with a double position. locking system, one for each side, you must check that it is closed on both its 04196S0001EM Note: side ends. Hood Release Lever Do not tamper with the props and 2. Go to the outside of the vehicle and assist the hood while lifting it. position yourself in front of the grille. Warning! Use both hands to lift the hood. 3. Lift the hood slightly. Before lifting, check that the windshield Be sure the hood is fully latched before wiper arms are not raised from the 4. Move the under-hood latch from right driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully windshield or in operation, that the to left to release the hood. latched, it could open when the vehicle is in vehicle is stationary and that the electric motion and block your vision. Failure to park brake is engaged. follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.

49 TRUNK Opening From The Inside Pull the lever in the direction indicated by When unlocked, the trunk lid can be the arrow to open the trunk lid. The lever The trunk unlocking is electrically can be seen in the dark. operated and is deactivated when the opened from inside the vehicle using the vehicle is in motion. interior trunk lid release button, located Closing under the dashboard near the engine Opening hood opening lever. Push the trunk lid Grip one of the handles and lower the trunk lid until it clicks. Opening From The Outside release button until you hear a “click.” When unlocked, the trunk lid can be opened from outside the vehicle using the exterior trunk lid release button located between the plate lights. Push the button until you hear a “click.” The trunk lid can also be opened by quickly pushing the exterior trunk lid release button on the key fob twice.

04206S0002EM 04206S0003EM Interior Trunk Lid Release Button Trunk Lid Interior Handles

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Trunk Lid Emergency Opening Note: A lever can be found in the trunk lid over It will not be possible to open the the lock to allow opening from the inside. trunk lid with a key or by pushing the button in the passenger compartment when the battery is disconnected. So, always position the manual trunk lid 04056S0005EM opening strap on the trunk lid lock Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button before disconnecting the battery. Refer The turn signal indicators will blink and to “Storing The Vehicle” in “Servicing And the interior lights will turn on when the Maintenance” for the procedure. trunk lid is opened. They turn off automatically when the trunk lid is closed.

The lights turn off automatically after a 04206S0006EM few minutes if the trunk lid is left open. Emergency Release Button 50 Trunk Initialization Rear Cargo Tie–Downs — If Equipped INTERNAL EQUIPMENT Note: If the battery is disconnected or There are four hooks inside the luggage Glove Compartment the protection fuse blows, the trunk lid compartment for attaching the cargo net opening/closing mechanism must be or cables which can safely secure the To open the glove compartment proceed re-initialized as follows: cargo. as follows: 1. Close all the doors and the trunk lid. 1. If equipped with a lock, unlock the glove compartment by placing the 2. Push the lock button on the remote emergency key in the lock on the handle. control. 2. Pull handle to open the glove 3. Push the unlock button on the remote compartment. control. Luggage Compartment Specifications Access To The Tire Service Kit To access the Tire Service Kit, lift the carpet in the luggage compartment. For 04206S0005EM its use, refer to ”Tire Service Kit” in “In Rear Cargo Tie-Downs Case Of Emergency” for further Note: Do not apply a load greater than information. 22 lbs (10 kg) on a single hook. Cargo Net — If Equipped This is useful for correctly arranging the 04246S0001EM cargo and/or for transporting light Opening The Glove Compartment materials. When the glove compartment is opened, The cargo net is available from an a light turns on to illuminate the inside of authorized dealer. the compartment. Note: Do not insert large objects that will prevent the glove compartment from closing completely. Always make sure that the glove compartment is 04206S0004EM completely closed when driving. Cargo Area

51 Sun Visors Homelink — If Equipped The following operation will delete the manufacture’s standard codes and does The sun visors are located at the sides of Description the interior rear view mirror. They can be not need to be repeated during the Homelink is a fixed system installed on adjusted forward and sideways. subsequent button programming: the vehicle. It can sync up to three To direct the visor toward the passenger Push and hold the outer buttons different devices that activate garage (1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the side window, detach the visor from the doors, gates, lighting systems, and home lighted indicators will start to flash. interior rear view mirror side hook and or office alarm systems. turn it towards the side window. Release both buttons. From this position, the sun visor can also Programming be extended toward to rear of the vehicle for additional blockage of sunlight. Courtesy mirrors with lights are fitted on Warning! the back of the sun visors and can be used even in poor light conditions. Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. Yourmotorized door or gate will open and 04246S0006NA close while you are programming the Garage Door Opener (Homelink) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE universal transceiver. Do not program the Buttons transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use 1 — Homelink Button 1 this transceiver with a garage door opener 2 — Homelink Button 2 that has a “stop and reverse” feature as 3 — Homelink Button 3 4 — Homelink Indicator 04246S0002EM required by Federal safety standards. This Rotate Sun Visor Toward Passenger includes most garage door opener models Window manufactured after 1982. Do not use a Note: Follow the steps below to begin garage door opener without these safety Note: A rear facing child restraint features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, programming your remote control to one system should never be fitted in the front on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety of the HomeLink buttons: passenger seat. Always comply with the information or assistance. 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink instructions on the sun visor. Refer to button (1, 2 or 3). "Child Restraints" in "Safety" for more Note: Without starting the engine, When the HomeLink indicator begins to information. activate the handbrake and place the flash slowly, move the portable remote ignition in the ON position. control one to three inches from the 52 HomeLink system (keeping the 2. The portable remote control seems to handbrake and turn the ignition to ON, programmable button pushed down). have programmed to the HomeLink without starting the engine. system, but the garage door or gate can Proceed as follows: 2. If the indicator does not begin to flash be neither opened or closed. quickly, change the distance between the 1. Locate the “Learn” or “Train” button on HomeLink and the portable remote 3. Push the programmed button and the garage door or gate motor. The color control and try the procedure again. keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). With an and position may vary depending on the alternative code system, the indicator manufacturer (consult the garage door or 3. The HomeLink indicator flashes, first flashes briefly, and then remains off for gate manual). Push the “Learn” or “Train” slowly and then quickly. When the two seconds. This sequence is repeated button (this normally activates the indicator starts to flash quickly, release for 20 seconds. setting warning light). both buttons. 2. Push the desired HomeLink button Using The Homelink System Warning! (1, 2 or 3). When the HomeLink indicator The HomeLink system activates the begins to flash slowly, move the portable garage door or gate motor, just like the remote control one to three inches from portable remote control. The car must be Vehicle exhaust contains carbon the HomeLink system (keeping the within the range of the garage door and monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your programmable button pushed down). the ignition must be in the ON position. vehicle in the garage while programming the Push the programmed button (1, 2 or 3). transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious 3. Within 30 seconds, push the While the signal is being transmitted, the injury or death. programmed key (1, 2 or 3) and release it. Push the programmed button a second indicator is lit and the system (garage Yourmotorized door or gate will open door, gate, etc.) will respond. 4 and close while you are programming the time and release it to conclude the operation. For some motors, the If the HomeLink system does not universal transceiver. Do not program the operation will probably have to be operate, the original portable remote transceiver if people, pets or other objects repeated a third time to end the setting. control may be equipped with an are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener The motor should now be capable of alternative code (refer to “Alternative that has a “stop and reverse” feature as Code Synchronization”). recognizing the signal transmitted by required by Federal safety standards. This HomeLink and then open/close the door If necessary, the original remote control includes most garage door opener models or gate. can still be used to operate the system. manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety Programming A Single Key Alternative Code Synchronization features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, It is possible to program another original To check whether the garage door or gate on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety remote control on an already motor has an alternative code, proceed information or assistance. programmed HomeLink key by canceling as follows: the previously stored frequency. 1. Read the garage door or gate motor Note: To program Homelink using an manufacturer manual. Alternative Code, the car must be within range of the garage door. Activate the 53 2. When the HomeLink indicator begins Technical Information For After Sales to flash slowly, move the portable remote Service Warning! control 1 to 3 inches from the system If you are unable to set up HomeLink (keeping the programmable button successfully after following the above Vehicle exhaust contains carbon pressed down). instructions, contact After Sales Service monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your If the indicator does not begin to flash (HomeLink free hotline number vehicle in the garage while programming the quickly, change the distance between the 1-800-355-3515 ) with the following transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious HomeLink and the portable remote information: injury or death. control and try the procedure again. Vehicle make and model, including Yourmotorized door or gate will open The HomeLink indicator flashes, first manufacturing year and country of and close while you are programming the slowly and then quickly. When the purchase; universal transceiver. Do not program the indicator starts to flash quickly, release transceiver if people, pets or other objects Make, model, age and frequency of use are in the path of the door or gate. Only use both buttons on the remote control. of the original portable remote control (if this transceiver with a garage door opener The system previously programmed to known). that has a “stop and reverse” feature as HomeLink has now been deleted and the General Information required by Federal safety standards. This new system is ready to use. This does not The following regulatory statement includes most garage door opener models affect the other two HomeLink buttons in manufactured after 1982. Do not use a applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) garage door opener without these safety any way. devices equipped in this vehicle: features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, Deleting Programmed Keys This device complies with Part 15 of the on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE FCC Rules and with Industry Canada information or assistance. It is recommended to delete HomeLink programming before selling the car. license-exempt RSS standard(s). All three keys are deleted Operation is subject to the following two Note: Activate the handbrake and place simultaneously. conditions: the ignition to ON without starting the engine. Proceed as follows: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and Proceed as follows: 1. Push and hold the outer buttons (1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the 2. This device must accept any 1. Push the desired HomeLink button indicator will start to flash. interference received, including and keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). Do not interference that may cause undesired release the button until the last 2. Release both keys. operation. operation has been performed. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 54 Center Console Cupholder ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION The center console storage compartment Two cupholders are available in the SYSTEMS is located between the front seats. center console. The following systems are used for To access the center console storage, lift reducing engine emissions: the upper part of the center console as Catalytic Converter shown below. Oxygen Sensors Evaporation Control System

04246S0005EM Cupholders In Center Console 1— Cover 04246S0004EM Center Console To access the cupholders, slide the cover forward. To close the compartment, push Warning! the cover and it will close automatically. Fire Extinguisher — If Equipped Do not operate this vehicle with a console If equipped, there is a fire extinguisher compartment lid in the open position. Driving located in the cargo area. with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.

55 ACTIVE AERODYNAMICS Front Mobile (Alfa Active Aero) This is an automatic device, working at the vehicle speed, which allows higher reactivity at average speeds and higher vehicle stability at high speeds, regulating the air flow into the lower part of the vehicle. Note: The system is not active in temperatures near or below zero, or when the Alfa DNA Pro selector is in the "Natural" or "Advanced Efficiency" positions. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

04296S0001EM Front Fascia If there is a fault, a generic failure icon will light up on the instrument panel display, along with a message that will identify the type of malfunction. See your authorized dealer if a fault occurs.

56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This section gives you all the information INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . .58 you need to understand and use INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . .60 the instrument panel correctly. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL .....65 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM . . .85

57 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES Instrument Cluster

05026S0006EM Instrument Cluster 1. Tachometer

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. Digital Engine Oil Temperature Gauge With Overheating Warning Light 3. Instrument Cluster Display 4. Digital Fuel Level Gauge (The Triangle On The Left Side Of The Symbol Indicates The Side Of The Vehicle With The Fuel Door) 5. Speedometer (Speed Indicator)

58 Tachometer Under normal usage, the temperature Note: If the low fuel warning light turns should remain around the middle of the on, refuel the vehicle at your nearest fuel The Tachometer indicates the engine digital scale according to the working station. Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). conditions. Adjusting Instrument Panel Lighting The warning light will turn on to signal (Brightness Sensor) the excessive increase of the engine oil Caution! Inside the Tachometer there is a light temperature. sensor capable of detecting light and In the event of excessive engine oil Do not travel with the fuel tank almost adjusting the brightness of the temperature, stop the engine empty: any gaps in fuel supply could damage instrument panel and the Information and immediately and contact an authorized the catalytic converter. Entertainment System display. dealer. Engine Oil Temperature Gauge Fuel Level Gauge Speedometer The digital indicator monitors the The digital fuel gauge monitors the The speedometer shows the vehicle temperature of the engine oil and starts amount of fuel in the tank. speed in miles per hour and/or kilometers supplying indications when the oil When the warning light turns on, a per hour (mph/km/h). temperature reaches approximately message is displayed, and a chime is 122° F (50°C). sound when 2.38 Gallons (9.0 L) of fuel are left in the tank.

59 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Instrument Cluster Display Description This vehicle is equipped with a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. When one or more of the doors have been opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF position, the instrument cluster will display the vehicle mileage for a few seconds. Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings, and failure indications. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

05036S0001QV Premium Instrument Cluster Display

60 Reconfigurable Multifunctional 4. Speed Limit Warning Light Navigation instructions and call Display Shows information regarding the Speed information can be repeated, besides on Limiter function. the Information and Entertainment 1. Headlight Warning Lights System display, also in this area of the Displays the headlight warning light for 5. Compass display, these functions can be set on the either of the following active modes: Information and Entertainment System. 6. Reconfigurable Main Area Headlights Home Can display the following screens: Automatic Headlights. Home The parameters shown on the display, for the modes: Dynamic, Natural and 2. Gear Selector Information Trip A Advanced Efficiency are: Displays the following information Trip B (can be activated/deactivated controlled by the gear selector function: Time through the Information and P = PARK Entertainment System) Outside Temperature R = REVERSE Performance Current Speed (shown if the repeat modes of the Phone and Navigation N = NEUTRAL The screens can be selected, on rotation, functions are not active) by pushing the MENU selection button on D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed) the windshield wiper stalk. Range AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear in manual (sequential) driving mode; – shifting to lower gear in sequential driving mode. 3. Forward Collision, Lane Departure, Cruise Control Displays operations for the following modes: Forward Collision Warning (FCW) 05036S0004NA Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 05036S0002EM MENU Selection Button Premium Instrument Cluster Display Cruise Control (CC) or Active Cruise Control (ACC) — if equipped Depending on the driving mode chosen using the “Alfa DNA Pro” (Dynamic, Natural, Advanced Efficiency and RACE), the screens can be graphically different. 61 Trip A And B To reset the values, push and hold down the button on the windshield wiper stalk. The "Trip computer" can be used to display, for all driving modes (Dynamic, Natural, Advanced Efficiency and RACE) and with the ignition device ON, the measurements regarding the operating state of the vehicle. This function is characterized by two separate records, called “Trip A”and “Trip B” (the latter can be deactivated by Information and 05036S0055NA Entertainment System), where the Premium Instrument Cluster Display “complete missions” (journeys) are recorded in a reciprocally independent In RACE mode, the consumption 05036S0002EM indication index is not active and a sports manner. Reset Button gearshift indicator is displayed. The “Trip A”and “Trip B” are used to display Performance sports gearshift indicator is represented the values relating to: by three yellow segments, if the third The displayed parameters differ indicator, characterized by the word Distance travelled according to the active mode. The modes "SHIFT,” is on, it means that the gear Average fuel consumption which can be selected using the “Alfa should be shifted. DNA Pro” system are: Average speed Natural Active trip Fuel consumption indicator GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

05036S0005NA

Race Mode 05036S0009NA Efficiency Consumption Graph 05036S0007NA Premium Instrument Cluster Display The screen graphically reproduces some parameters closely linked to the 62 efficiency of the driving style, with a view Dynamic The displayed parameters are related to to limiting consumption. vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the trend of the longitudinal/lateral Advanced Efficiency accelerations (G-meter information), considering gravity acceleration as a reference unit. Lateral acceleration peaks are also indicated. 7. Vehicle Range Indicates the miles left before the fuel

05036S0013NA tank is empty. Acceleration Gauge Displays the position by indicating the

05036S0011NA The displayed parameters are related to cardinal direction. Dynamic Driving Style vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the 8. Failure Warning Lights trend of the longitudinal/lateral The three center icons on the screen accelerations (G-meter information), Area dedicated to displaying failures, the indicate the effectiveness of the driving considering gravity acceleration as a following symbols could be displayed on style, linked to the following parameters: reference unit. rotation: acceleration, deceleration and gear shifts, with a view to limiting Lateral acceleration peaks are also Low criticality symbols (yellow amber). consumption. The bar below the icons indicated. High criticality symbols (red). shows current consumption and the Race green line represents the optimal area. 9. Odometer The globe lights up gradually according to Indicates the total miles travelled. lower consumption.

05036S0014NA Acceleration Stability Gauge 63 PARAMETERS SET BY USER 2. Select “Settings” from the main menu Language: change the language of the using the Rotary Knob system Restore Settings: restores the factory settings To access and change the setting, turn and push the Rotary Pad. Clock & Date

05036S0015EM Information and Entertainment System

Multiple settings can be programmed by 05036S0040EM the user using the Information and MENU button Entertainment System. This section describes only the basic settings: Units & Language Units & Language Time & Date 05036S0017EM Cluster Clock & Date Menu Option To access the settings list in the The following settings can be modified Information and Entertainment System, under the “Clock & Date” menu: proceed as follows: Sync With GPS Time: activates or 1. Press the MENU button to access the deactivates the clock synchronization main menu through the GPS. If the function is 05036S0016EM deactivated, the options Set Time and Units & Language Selectable Menu

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Set Date are enabled. Options Set Time: set the time manually The following settings can be modified under the “Units & Language” menu: Time Format: set the time format to either a 12-hour and a 24-hour clock Measure Units: select US, metric, or custom. The custom option allows for Set Date: set the date manually individual selection of the unit measures Restore Settings: restores the factory settings 64 To access and the change the setting, WARNING LIGHTS AND The failure indicators appearing on turn and push the Rotary Pad. MESSAGES ON THE the display are divided into two Cluster INSTRUMENT PANEL categories: very serious and less serious faults. Serious faults are indicated by a The following pages consist of warning repeated and prolonged warning "cycle.” lights and messages. Less serious faults are indicated by a Note: warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. Youcan stop the warning cycle in both The warning light turns on together cases by pushing the button located on with a dedicated message and/or chime the windshield wiper stalk. The when applicable. These indications are instrument panel warning light will stay precautionary and as such must not be on until the cause of the failure is considered as exhaustive and/or eliminated. alternative to the information contained

05036S0018EM in the Owner’s Manual, which you are Instrument Cluster Display Menu advised to read carefully in all cases. Option Always refer to the information in this section in the event of a failure The following settings can be modified indication. under the “Cluster” menu: Warning buzzer volume: set the volume of the warning buzzer Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip function Phone repeat: activate or deactivate repeating the Phone function screens on the instrument cluster display Restore Settings: restores the factory settings To access and the change the setting, turn and push the Rotary Pad.

65 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE ON This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer to If the light remains on when the parking brake has been have the system checked as soon as possible. disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the Release the electric park brake, then check that the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake warning light has turned off. hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the If the warning light stays on, contact an authorized dealer. Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD) FAILURE The simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer to (amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates have the system inspected immediately.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly.

66 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

SEATBELTREMINDER WARNING LIGHT When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front Always wear your seat belt when operating the vehicle. passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety” for further information.

OIL TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.

Warning!

The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately. If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on the display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately. 67 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHT This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as service is required. However, the conventional brake system will possible. continue to operate normally if the brake indicator light is not on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHT The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) at a speed no higher optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be then 50 mph (80 km/h). Contact an authorized dealer to have guaranteed. the tire repaired. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL in sequence.

68 Each tire, including the spare (if Please note that the TPMS is not a properly. Always check the TPMS provided), should be checked monthly substitute for proper tire maintenance, malfunction telltale after replacing one when cold and inflated to the inflation and it is the driver’s responsibility to or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to pressure recommended by the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if ensure that the replacement or alternate manufacturer on the vehicle placard or under-inflation has not reached the level tires and wheels allow the TPMS to tire inflation pressure label. (If your to trigger illumination of the TPMS low continue to function properly. vehicle has tires of a different size than tire pressure telltale. the size indicated on the vehicle placard Yourvehicle has also been equipped with or tire inflation pressure label, you should a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate Caution! determine the proper tire inflation when the system is not operating pressure for those tires.) properly. The TPMS malfunction As an added safety feature, your vehicle indicator is combined with the low tire The TPMS has been optimized for the has been equipped with a Tire Pressure pressure telltale. When the system original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS Monitoring System (TPMS) that detects a malfunction, the telltale will pressures and warning have been illuminates a low tire pressure telltale flash for approximately one minute and established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or when one or more of your tires is then remain continuously illuminated. sensor damage may result when using significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, This sequence will continue upon replacement equipment that is not of the when the low tire pressure telltale subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket illuminates, you should stop and check the malfunction exists. When the wheels can cause sensor damage. Using your tires as soon as possible and inflate malfunction indicator is illuminated, the aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire them to the proper pressure. Driving on a system may not be able to detect or Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor significantly under-inflated tire causes signal low tire pressure as intended. to become inoperable. After using an the tire to overheat and can lead to tire TPMS malfunctions may occur for a aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel variety of reasons, including the that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function efficiency and tire tread life, and may installation of replacement or alternate checked. affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping tires or wheels on the vehicle that ability. prevent the TPMS from functioning

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

Tire Pressure Low In any situation in which the message on the display is "See The indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tire Manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to “Auxiliary Driving pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that Systems” in “Safety,” strictly complying with the slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire indications that you find there. duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. 69 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATOR LIGHT When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the system is indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: it indicates that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turn off, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found in the ESC system. In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of the indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFF INDICATOR LIGHT — IF EQUIPPED When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. The indicator light illuminates to indicate that some active safety systems have been partially or totally deactivated. For further details about the active safety systems, refer to “Active Safety Systems” in “Safety.” When the active GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL safety systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns off.

REAR FOG LIGHT The indicator illuminates when the rear fog light is activated.

70 Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL) In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON, the Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue travelling indicator light illuminates, but it should turn off as soon as at moderate speed but without demanding excessive the engine is started. effort from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of the The operation of the indicator light may be checked by the vehicle with the indicator light on constantly may cause traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws damage. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. and regulations of the country where you are driving.

Caution!

If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versions together with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) — IF EQUIPPED Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon This indicator light informs the driver that the frontal as possible. collision alarm function is not enabled.

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE The indicator light (or the symbol in the display) Refuel the vehicle. illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left in the tank.

Warning!

If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer. 71 Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Indicator light What It Means What To Do

PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHT This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

Headlight Off Delay This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in the STOP position.

LEFTTURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the right directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

RIGHTTURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the right turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved up (right).

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the left directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS (On Base Instrument Cluster Display) This indicator light will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated. 72 Blue Telltale Indicator Light

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS (On Base Instrument Cluster Display) This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Push the lever a second time to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.

Red Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To Do

LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the telltale turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this telltale turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This telltale does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Note: Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved. The illumination of the telltale does not indicate the amount of oil in the engine: the oil level can be checked on the display upon entering the vehicle and also by activating the "Oil level" function on the Information and Entertainment System. The oil level can also be checked manually. 73 Caution!

If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

In normal driving conditions: stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, top up ENGINE TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT with coolant and check that the level is between the MIN This telltale warns of an overheated engine condition. If and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check visually the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator for any fluid leaks. Contact an authorized dealer if the will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the telltale comes on when the engine is started again. temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in will be sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is allowed to high-performance driving): slow down and, if the telltale cool whichever comes first. stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for two or three minutes with the engine running and slightly accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the engine off. Check that the coolant level is correct as described above.

POWER STEERING FAILURE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the telltale remains on, you could not have steering Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. assistance and the effort required to operate the steering wheel could be increased; steering is, however, possible.

DOOR OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale illuminates when one or more doors are not Close the doors properly. completely shut. An acoustic signal is activated with the doors open and the vehicle moving.

74 Symbol What It Means What To Do

HOOD OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale turns on when the hood is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an open Close the hood properly. hood appears on the display. A buzzer is heard when the hood is open and the vehicle is moving.

TRUNK LID OPEN INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale turns on when the trunk lid is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an Close the trunk lid properly. open trunk lid appears on the display. A buzzer is heard when the trunk lid is open and the vehicle is moving.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FAILURE The telltale illuminates, together with a buzzer warning, to Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty.

Caution!

Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with hot engine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.

75 Symbol What It Means What To Do

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) WARNING LIGHTS Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This telltale, along with the related message, signals a failure in the electronic throttle control system (ETC).

Place the ignition in the off position and the shift selector in the park position: the telltale should turn off. If the If a failure is detected, the telltale illuminates while the telltale stays on with engine running the vehicle can still be engine is running. driven. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

If the telltale flashes with the engine running, immediate intervention is required. A loss of performance, Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have irregular/high idling speed or engine stopping might take the failure eliminated. place and the vehicle may need to be towed.

LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL This telltale appears on the panel when the engine oil level falls below the minimum recommended value. Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. The level must also be checked using the dipstick in the engine compartment (see chapter "Servicing and Maintenance.")

ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILURE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The illumination of the telltale signals a failure in the Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. automatic steering correction system.

ALTERNATOR FAILURE The illumination of the telltale with engine on corresponds Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. to an alternator failure.

76 Amber Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To Do

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT

Engine Immobilizer System Failure Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the Engine Immobilizer system.

Break-In Attempt The telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled to ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attempt detected by the alarm system.

Electronic Key Not Recognized The telltale will illuminate when the engine is started and the electronic key is not recognized by the system.

Alarm System Failure The telltale will illuminate to report an alarm system failure.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT “Enhanced Accident Response System” in “Occupant The telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred Restraint Systems" in "Safety” for further information. If it and the system has shut the fuel off. is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an authorized dealer.

PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate when the system has failed or is Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. not available.

77 Symbol What It Means What To Do

POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD The telltale will illuminate when the outside temperature falls to or below 37°F (3°C).

ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — IF EQUIPPED The telltale is illuminated only for a limited time. Note: After the first indication, each time the engine is started the symbol will continue to illuminate as described above until the oil is changed. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is a fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated by using the vehicle for short drives, preventing the engine from reaching operating temperature.

Caution!

Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) after it first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

78 Symbol What It Means What To Do

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. pressure sensor failure.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil level Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. sensor failure.

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Forward Collision Warning system.

START/STOP SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have This telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Start system the failure eliminated. failure.

RAIN SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. automatic windshield wiper.

DUSK SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. automatic low beam alignment.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind Spot Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Monitoring system failure.

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensor Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. failure.

79 Symbol What It Means What To Do

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on the The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical lights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailer connection. lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators / rear Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an fog light / reversing light / brake lights / license plate authorized dealer. lights.

KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless system Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. failure.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-off Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. system failure.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Lane Departure Warning system.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the the failure eliminated. automatic high beam headlights. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

80 Symbol What It Means What To Do

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING The telltale will illuminate in the case of transmission Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off or idling. overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this case an engine performance limitation is carried out.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audio the failure eliminated. system.

SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have While driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a Speed the failure eliminated. Limiter system failure.

LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly Tighten the cap properly. closed.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE FAILURE The telltale will illuminate and a message will display to signal a failure in the electric park brake system. If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is not This failure may partially or completely block the vehicle engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer and because the park brake could remain activated even if remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands, automatically or manually disengaged using the relevant that the electric park brake is not operational. controls. In these circumstances, you can disengage the park brake following the emergency disengagement procedure described in “In Case Of Emergency.”

Warning!

If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.

81 Symbol What It Means What To Do

LOW COOLANT LEVEL — IF EQUIPPED This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle Top up, as described in "Servicing And Maintenance.” coolant level is low.

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM This light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. (ACC) is not operating and needs service.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. WEAR ON BRAKE PADS Note: This light will illuminate when the brake pads have reached Always use genuine parts or similar because the their wear limit. Integrated Brake System (IBS) system could detect anomalies.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. WEAR ON CCB BRAKE DISCS — IF EQUIPPED Warning! This light will illuminate when the carbon ceramic brake It is recommended to use only original or equivalent, discs have reached their wear limit. bench-tested spare pads in order to ensure the original performance of the braking system.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in the dynamic GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL drive control system.

WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer. Signals a windshield wiper failure.

82 Symbol What It Means What To Do

GENERIC INDICATION Signals information and failures. The accompanying messages describe the failure.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have This telltale will illuminate to report a four wheel drive the failure eliminated. system failure.

AFS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate the automatic Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked. directional light system failure.

SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION INSERTION — IF EQUIPPED The telltale will illuminate when the most comfortable suspension setting is activated.

SHOCK ABSORBERS FAILURE (ADC) — IF EQUIPPED While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failure Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. in the suspension system.

To refill the liquid, refer to “Engine Compartment” in WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVEL “Servicing And Maintenance.” Always use liquid with the The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of the features indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section in windshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low. “Technical Specifications.”

83 Green Symbols

Symbol What It Means

HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS The symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.

START/STOP OPERATION The telltale will illuminate in the case of Start/Stop system intervention (stopping the engine). When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off (for the engine restarting modes refer to “Stop/Start” in “Starting And Operating”).

SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATED The telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

Blue Symbols

Symbol What it means GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.

84 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) SYSTEM Cybersecurity Operation Yourvehicle is required to have an The OBD (Onboard Diagnostic system) Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and carries out a continuous diagnosis of the a connection port to allow access to components of the vehicle related to information related to the performance emissions. of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access It also alerts the driver of when these this information to assist with the components are no longer in peak diagnosis and service of your vehicle and condition by switching on the warning emissions system. light on the instrument panel (see “Warning Lights And Messages” paragraph in this chapter). Warning! The aim of the OBD system (Onboard Diagnostic) is to: Monitor the efficiency of the system ONLYan authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II Indicate an increase in emissions connection port in order to diagnose or Indicate the need to replace damaged service your vehicle. components If unauthorized equipment is connected The vehicle also has a connector, which to the OBD II connection port, such as a can interface with appropriate tools, that driver-behavior tracking device, it may: makes it possible to read the error codes Be possible that vehicle systems, stored in the electronic control units including safety related systems, could be together with a series of specific impaired or a loss of vehicle control could parameters for engine operation and occur that may result in an accident diagnosis. This check can be carried out involving serious injury or death. by your authorized dealer. Access, or allow others to access, Note: After eliminating a fault, to check information stored in your vehicle systems, the system completely, your authorized including personal information. dealer is obliged to run tests and, if necessary certain road tests.

85 SAFETY

This very important section describes ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ...... 87 SAFETY the safety systems that your vehicle may AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ....90 be equipped with, and provides OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . .99 instructions on how to use them SAFETYTIPS ...... 122 correctly.

86 ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS The Electronic Braking Force Distribution The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws (EBD) system works with the ABS, of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can The vehicle may be equipped with the allowing the brake force to be distributed it increase braking or steering efficiency following active safety devices: between the front and rear wheels. beyond that afforded by the condition of the Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System vehicle brakes and tires or the traction Drive Train Control (DTC) System System Intervention afforded. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) The ABS equipped on this vehicle is provided with the "Brake-by-wire" The ABS cannot prevent collisions, System including those resulting from excessive Traction Control System (TCS) (Integrated Brake System - IBS) function. speed in turns, following another vehicle too With this system, the command given by Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System closely, or hydroplaning. pressing the brake pedal is not Hill Start Assist (HSA) System transmitted hydraulically, but electrically. The capabilities of an ABS equipped Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless System or dangerous manner that could jeopardize on the pedal with the traditional system the user’s safety or the safety of others. Active TorqueVectoring (ATV) System is no longer noticeable. For the operation of the systems, see the following pages. Drive Train Control (DTC) System — If Warning! Equipped Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System Some models of this vehicle are equipped An integral part of the braking system, with an All-Wheel Drive system (AWD), the ABS prevents one or more wheels The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be which offers an optimal drive for from locking and slipping in all road susceptible to interference caused by countless driving conditions and road surface conditions, regardless of the improperly installed or high output radio surfaces. The system reduces the intensity of the braking action. The transmitting equipment. This interference slipping of the tires to a minimum, system ensures that the vehicle can be can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking automatically redistributing the torque controlled even during emergency capability. Installation of such equipment to the front and rear wheels as needed. braking, allowing the driver to optimize should be performed by qualified To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle with professionals. stopping distances. AWD automatically passes to rear-wheel The system intervenes during braking Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will drive (RWD) when the road and when the wheels are about to lock, diminish their effectiveness and may lead to environmental conditions are such that typically in emergency braking or a collision. Pumping makes the stopping they wouldn't cause the tires to slip. low-grip conditions where locking may be distance longer. Just press firmly on your When the road and environmental more frequent. brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. conditions require better traction, the The system also improves control and vehicle automatically goes to AWD mode. stability of the vehicle when braking on a The driving mode, RWD or AWD, is shown surface where the grip of the left and on the instrument cluster display. right wheels varies, such as in a corner. 87 Note: If the system failure symbol System Intervention and unevenly worn tires may also degrade switches on, after starting the engine or The intervention of the system is ESC performance. Any vehicle modification while driving, it means that the AWD indicated by the flashing of the ESC or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces system is not working properly. If the warning light on the instrument panel, to the effectiveness of the ESC system can warning message activates frequently, it increase the risk of loss of vehicle control,

SAFETY inform the driver that the vehicle is recommended to carry out the stability and grip are critical. vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. maintenance operations. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Traction Control System (TCS) Warning! System The system automatically operates in the The ESC system improves the directional event of slipping, loss of grip on wet control and stability of the vehicle in Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot roads (hydroplaning), and acceleration on various driving conditions. prevent the natural laws of physics from one or both drive wheels on roads that The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the are slippery, snowy, icy, etc. Depending traction afforded by prevailing road on the slipping conditions, two different understeer and oversteer, distributing conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, the brake force on the appropriate control systems are activated: including those resulting from excessive If the slipping involves both drive wheels. The torque supplied by the speed in turns, driving on very slippery engine can also be reduced in order to surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot wheels, the system intervenes, reducing maintain control of the vehicle. prevent accidents resulting from loss of the power transmitted by the engine. The ESC system uses sensors installed vehicle control due to inappropriate driver If the slipping only involves one of the on the vehicle to determine the path that input for the conditions. Only a safe, drive wheels, the Brake Limited attentive, and skillful driver can prevent Differential (BLD) function is activated, the driver intends to follow and accidents. The capabilities of an ESC compares it with the vehicle’s effective equipped vehicle must never be exploited in automatically braking the wheel which is path. When the real path deviates from a reckless or dangerous manner which could slipping (the behavior of a self-locking the desired path, the ESC system jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of differential is simulated). This will intervenes to counter the vehicle’s others. increase the engine torque transferred to understeer or oversteer. Vehicle modifications, or failure to the wheel which isn't slipping. Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is properly maintain your vehicle, may change turning more than it should according to the handling characteristics of your vehicle, System Intervention the angle of the steering wheel. and may negatively affect the performance The intervention of the system is Understeer occurs when the vehicle is of the ESC system. Changes to the steering indicated by the flashing of the ESC system, suspension, braking system, tire turning less than it should according to warning light on the instrument panel, to type and size or wheel size may adversely inform the driver that the vehicle the angle of the steering wheel. affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated stability and grip are critical.

88 Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, The PBA system is designed to improve which could jeopardize the user's safety or Warning! the vehicle’s braking capacity during the safety of others. emergency braking. The system detects emergency braking Hill Start Assist (HSA) System There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight by monitoring the speed and force with This is an integral part of the ESC system which the brake pedal is pressed, and rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or and facilitates starting on slopes, with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a consequently applies the optimal brake activating automatically in the following trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active pressure. This can reduce the braking cases: driving involvement. It is always the driver’s distance: the PBA system therefore Uphill: vehicle stationary on a road responsibility to be attentive to distance to complements the ABS. with a gradient higher than 5%, engine other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe Maximum assistance from the PBA running, brake pressed and transmission system is obtained by pressing the brake operation of the vehicle under all road in NEUTRAL (N) or gear other than pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake conditions. Yourcomplete attention is always required while driving to maintain pedal should be pressed continuously REVERSE (R) engaged. Downhill: vehicle stationary on a road safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow during braking, avoiding intermittent these warnings can result in a collision or presses, to get the most out of the with a gradient higher than 5%, engine serious personal injury. system. Do not reduce pressure on the running, brake pressed and reverse gear brake pedal until braking is no longer engaged. Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System necessary. When setting off, the ESC system control The DST function uses the integration of The PBA system is deactivated when the unit maintains the braking pressure on the ESC system with the electric power brake pedal is released. the wheels until the engine torque steering to increase the safety level of necessary for starting is reached, or in the whole vehicle. any case for a maximum of two seconds, Warning! allowing your right foot to be moved In critical situations (braking on surfaces easily from the brake pedal to the with different grip conditions), the ESC accelerator. system controls the steering through the The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot prevent DST function to implement an additional The system will automatically deactivate the natural laws of physics from acting on torque contribution on the steering wheel the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction after two seconds without starting, in order to suggest the most correct afforded by prevailing road conditions. PBA gradually releasing the braking pressure. maneuver to the driver. cannot prevent collisions, including those During this release stage, it is possible to resulting from excessive speed in turns, hear a typical mechanical brake release The coordinated action of the brakes and driving on very slippery surfaces, or noise, indicating the imminent movement steering increases the sensation of hydroplaning. The capabilities of a safety and control of the vehicle. PBA-equipped vehicle must never be of the vehicle.

89 Note: The DST feature is only meant to AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS help the driver realize the correct course of action through small torques on the The following auxiliary driving systems steering wheel, which means the are available in this vehicle: effectiveness of the DST feature is highly

SAFETY Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is very important to realize that this Tire Pressure Monitoring System feature will not steer the vehicle, (TPMS) meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the vehicle. Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System 06016S0002EM Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) System The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system BSM Indicator Light uses two radar sensors, located in the The dynamic drive control is used to rear bumper (one for each side), to detect When the engine is started the warning optimize and balance the drive torque the presence of other vehicles in the rear light turns on to signal the driver that the between the wheels of the same axles. side blind spots of your vehicle. system is active. The ATVsystem improves the grip in turns, sending more drive torque to the Sensors external wheel. The sensors are activated when any Given that, in a turn, the external wheels forward gear is engaged at a speed of the car travel more than the internal higher than approximately 6 mph ones and therefore turn faster, sending a (10 km/h) or when REVERSE is engaged. higher thrust to the external rear wheel The sensors are temporarily deactivated allows for the car to be more stable and when the vehicle is stationary and in to not suffer an "understeer" condition. PARK (P). Understeer occurs when the vehicle is The detection area of the system covers turning less than appropriate for the approximately a lane on both sides of the steering wheel position. 06016S0001EM vehicle which is around 9 ft (3 m). Rear Sensor Location This area begins from the door mirror and The system warns the driver about the extends for approximately 19 ft (6 m) presence of other vehicles in the towards the rear part of the vehicle. detection area by illuminating the When the sensors are active, the system warning light located within the door monitors the detection areas on both mirror on the side in which the other sides of the vehicle and warns the driver vehicle was detected. about the possible presence of vehicles in these areas. 90 While driving, the system monitors the Note: If the difference in speed between the detection area from three different input two vehicles is greater than For the system to operate correctly, points (side, rear and front) to check approximately 15 mph (25 km/h), the the rear bumper area where the radar whether an alert needs to be sent to the warning light does not illuminate. sensors are located must stay free from driver. The system can detect the snow, ice and dirt gathered from the Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) System presence of a vehicle in one of these road surface. three areas. This system helps the driver during Do not cover the rear bumper area reverse maneuvers in the case of reduced Note: where the radar sensors are located with visibility. The system does not alert the any object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, etc.). The RCP system monitors the rear detection areas on both sides of the driver for the presence of fixed object If you wish to install the tow hook (e.g. safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.). vehicle to detect objects moving towards after purchasing the vehicle, you need to the sides of the vehicle, with a minimum However, in some circumstances, the deactivate the system via the system may activate in the presence of speed between approximately 1 mph Information and Entertainment System. (1 km/h) and 2 mph (3 km/h) and objects these objects. This is normal and does To access the function, select the not indicate a system malfunction. moving at a maximum speed of 21 mph following items in sequence on the main (35 km/h), in areas such as parking lots. The system does not alert the driver menu: The system activation is signaled to the about the presence of vehicles coming 1. “Settings.” driver by an acoustic warning. from the opposite direction, in the adjacent lanes. 2. “Safety.” Note: If the sensors are covered by 3. “Blind Spot Alert.” objects or vehicles, the system will not warn the driver. Rear View Warning! The system detects vehicles coming from Warning! the rear part of your vehicle on both sides The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an and entering the rear detection area with aid to help detect objects in the blind spot a difference in speed of less than 31 mph Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a zones. The BSM system is not designed to (50 km/h) with relation to your vehicle. back up aid system. It is intended to be used detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in Even if your vehicle is equipped with the Overtaking Vehicles a parking lot situation. Drivers must be BSM system, always check your vehicle’s If another vehicle is overtaken slowly, careful when backing up, even when using mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use with a difference in speed of less than RCP.Always check carefully behind your your turn signal before changing lanes. approximately 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check Failure to do so can result in serious injury for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, or death. vehicle stays in the blind spot for obstructions, and blind spots before backing approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning up. Failure to do so can result in serious light on the door mirror of the injury or death. corresponding side illuminates. 91 Operating Mode General Information The system may be activated/ This vehicle has systems that operate deactivated via the Information and on radio frequency that comply with Entertainment System. To access the Part 15 of the Federal

SAFETY function, select the following items on Communications Commission (FCC) the main menu in sequence: rules and with Industry Canada 1. “Settings.” Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310. Operation is subject to the following two 2. “Safety.” conditions: 3. “Blind Spot Alert.” 1. The device may not cause harmful 06016S0003EM "Blind Spot Alert,” "Visual" Mode interference. Front Bumper Radar Location When the system is enabled, the warning 2. The device must accept any light within the door mirror on the side of interference received, including the detected object illuminates. interference that may cause undesired The visual warning on the mirror will blink operation of the device. if the driver activates the turn signals, Changes or modifications to any of these thus indicating the intention to change systems by other than an authorized lane. service facility could void authorization The warning will be fixed if the driver to use this equipment. stays in the same lane. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) "Blind Spot Alert" Function System Deactivation This is a driving assistance system which When the system is deactivated ("Blind 06016S0004EM comprises a radar located behind the Spot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCP Windshield Camera Location front bumper and a camera located in the systems will not emit neither an acoustic central part of the windshield. In the event of an imminent collision, the nor visual warnings. system intervenes by automatically The BSM system will store the operating braking the vehicle to prevent the crash mode running when the engine was or reduce its effects. stopped. Each time the engine is started, The system provides the driver with the operating mode stored previously will audible and visual signals through be recalled and used. specific messages on the instrument cluster display.

92 The system may lightly brake to warn the braking, automatic braking or additional driver if a possible frontal accident is assistance in braking stage. The system Warning! detected (limited braking). Signals and will therefore provide no indication of a limited braking are intended to allow the possible accident. driver to react promptly, in order to Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not Activation/Deactivation prevent or reduce the effects of a intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor The Forward Collision Warning system is potential accident. can FCW detect every type of potential activated whenever the engine is started collision. The driver has the responsibility to In situations with the risk of collision, if regardless of what is shown on the the system detects no intervention by avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this Information and Entertainment System. the driver, it provides automatic braking warning could lead to serious injury or death. Following a deactivation, the system will to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the not warn the driver about the possible potential frontal collision (automatic Engagement/Disengagement collision with the preceding vehicle, braking). If intervention by the driver on regardless of the setting selected with the brake pedal is detected, but not The following functions can be selected the Information and Entertainment deemed sufficient, the system may in sequence using the Information and System. intervene in order to improve the Entertainment System: “Settings”, reaction of the braking system, therefore “Safety”, “Forward Collision Warning” and Note: Each time the engine is started, reducing vehicle speed further "Mode". Select from among three the system is activated regardless of (additional assistance in braking stage). operating modes: what setting was selected when it was previously switched off. The system will intervene automatically Warning And Brake: the system This function is not active at a speed in case of imminent collision or impact (if active), in addition to the visual and against a pedestrian crossing the road lower than 4 mph (7 km/h) or higher than audible warnings, provides limited 124 mph (200 km/h). (speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)). braking, automatic braking and additional The system is active when: Note: For safety reasons, when the assistance in braking stage, where the vehicle has stopped, the brake calipers driver does not brake sufficiently in the The engine is started. may remain blocked for about two event of a potential frontal impact. seconds. Make sure you press the brake Is active (on) in the Information and pedal if the vehicle moves slightly Only Warning: the system (if active), Entertainment System. does not provide limited braking, but forward. The ignition is in the ON position. guarantees automatic braking or additional assistance in braking stage, The vehicle speed is between 4 mph where the driver does not brake at all or (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). not sufficiently in the event of a potential The front seat belts are fastened. frontal impact. The Alfa DNA Pro Selector is not in Disable: the system does not provide “RACE” position (where present). visual and audible warnings, limited 93 Changing The System Sensitivity System Limited Operation Signal display and the system will be The sensitivity of the system can be If the dedicated message is displayed, a deactivated. This message can changed through the Information and condition limiting the system operation sometimes appear in conditions of high Entertainment System menu, choosing may have occurred. The possible reasons reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective tiles or ice or snow). When the conditions

SAFETY from one of the following three options: of this limitation are something blocking "Near", "Med" or "Far". Refer to the the camera view or a fault. limiting the system functions end, this description in the “Information and If an obstruction is signaled, clean the will go back to normal and complete Entertainment System Supplement” for area of the windshield indicated in. operation. how to change the settings. Although the vehicle can still be driven in In certain particular cases, this dedicated The pre-set option is "Med". With this normal conditions, the system may be not message could be displayed when the setting, the system warns the driver of a completely available. radar is not detecting any vehicles or objects within its view range. possible collision with the vehicle in front When the conditions limiting the system when that vehicle is at a standard functions end, this will go back to normal If atmospheric conditions are not the real distance, between that of the other two and complete operation. Should the fault reason behind this message, check if the settings. persist, contact an authorized dealer. sensor is dirty. It could be necessary to clean or remove any obstructions in the With the system sensitivity set to "Far", System Failure Signaling the system will warn the driver of a area. possible collision with the vehicle in front If the system switches off and a If the message appears often, even in the when that vehicle is at a greater distance, dedicated message is shown on the absence of atmospheric conditions such thus providing the possibility of acting on display, it means that there is a fault on as snow, rain, mud or other obstructions, the brakes more lightly and gradually. the system. contact an authorized dealer for a sensor This setting provides the drivers with the In this case, it is still possible to drive the alignment check. maximum possible reaction time to vehicle, but you are advised to contact an In the absence of visible obstructions, prevent a potential accident. authorized dealer as soon as possible. manually removing the decorative cover With the option set to "Near", the system Radar Indication Not Available trim and cleaning the radar surface could will alert the driver of a possible collision If conditions are such that the radar be required. Have this operation with the vehicle in front when that vehicle cannot detect obstacles correctly, the performed at an authorized dealer. is close. This setting offers the driver a system is deactivated and a dedicated Note: It is recommended that you do not lower reaction time compared to the message appears on the display. This install devices, accessories or "Med" and "Far" settings, in the event of a generally occurs in the event of poor aerodynamic attachments in front of the potential collision, but permits more visibility, such as when it is snowing or sensor or darken it in any way, as this can dynamic driving of the vehicle. raining heavily. compromise the correct functioning of The system sensitivity setting is kept in The system can also be temporarily the system. the memory when the engine is switched dimmed due to obstructions such as mud, off. dirt or ice on the bumper. In such cases, a dedicated message will be shown on the 94 Frontal Collision Alarm With Active Note: In particularly complex traffic Braking — If Equipped conditions, the driver can deactivate the If this function is selected, the brakes are system manually through the Information operated to reduce the speed of the and Entertainment System. vehicle in the event of potential frontal Driving Close To A Bend impact. When entering or leaving a wide bend, the This function applies an additional system may detect a vehicle in front you, braking pressure if the braking pressure but not driving on the same driving lane. applied by the driver does not suffice to In cases such as these, the system may prevent potential frontal impact. intervene.

The function is active with speed above 06016S0010EM 4 mph (7 km/h). Driving In Roundabouts Driving In Special Conditions Vehicles With Small Dimensions In certain driving conditions, such as, for And/Or Not Aligned In The Driving Lane example: The system cannot detect vehicles in Driving close to a bend. front of you but outside the range of the radar sensor and may therefore not react The vehicle ahead is leaving a in the presence of small vehicles, such as roundabout. bicycles or motorcycles. Vehicles with small dimensions and/or not aligned in the driving lane. 06016S0005EM Driving Around Wide Curves Lane change by other vehicles. The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A Vehicles travelling at right angles to Roundabout the vehicle. On a roundabout, the system could System intervention might be intervene if it detects a vehicle ahead unexpected or delayed. The driver must which is leaving the roundabout. therefore be very careful, keeping control of the vehicle to drive in complete safety. 06016S0006EM Driving Near Small Vehicles

95 Lane Change By Other Vehicles Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Vehicles suddenly changing lane, entering Warning! the driving lane of the vehicle and inside This vehicle is equipped with a Tire the radar sensor operating range, may Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that The system has not been designed to

SAFETY cause system activation. sends the inflation pressure information prevent impacts and cannot detect possible of each tire to the control unit, and will conditions leading to an accident in advance. signal the driver in the event of Failure to take into account this warning insufficient tire pressure. may lead to serious or fatal injuries. Tire pressure will vary with temperature The system may activate, assessing the by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the reflecting metal objects different from other outside temperature decreases, the tire vehicles, such as safety barriers, road signs, barriers before parking lots, tollgates, level pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure crossings, gates, railways, objects near road should always be set based on cold constructions sites or higher than the vehicle inflation tire pressure. This is defined as (e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the system the tire pressure after the vehicle has not 06016S0007EM may intervene inside multi-story parking lots been driven for at least three hours, or Other Vehicles Changing Lanes or tunnels, or due to a glare on the road driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles To surface. These possible activations are a three hour period. The cold tire inflation The Vehicle consequence of the real driving scenario pressure must not exceed the maximum coverage by the system and must not be inflation pressure molded into the tire The system may temporarily react to a regarded as faults. vehicle that is passing through the radar sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing sensor’s operating range at right angles. The system has been designed for road And Maintenance” for information on use only. If the vehicle is driven on a track, how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. the system must be deactivated to avoid The tire pressure will also increase as the unnecessary warnings. Automatic vehicle is driven. This is normal, and there deactivation is signaled by the dedicated warning light/symbol switching on in the should be no adjustment for this instrument panel (refer to the instructions in increased pressure. the "Warning Lights And Messages On The The TPMS will signal the driver if Instrument Panel" in "Getting To Know Your pressure falls below the warning limit for Instrument Panel" for further information). any reason, including the effects of low temperature and normal loss of pressure from the tire. The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient 06016S0008EM tire pressure when pressure is equal to or Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar greater than the prescribed cold inflation Range 96 level. Therefore, if insufficient tire INSUFFICIENT TIRE PRESSURE pressure is indicated by the ( ) warning INDICATION Caution! light displaying in the instrument cluster, If an insufficient pressure value is increase the inflation pressure up to the detected on one or more tires, the prescribed cold inflation value. The TPMS has been optimized for the warning light in the instrument cluster The system will automatically update, original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS will display alongside the dedicated and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale pressures and warning have been messages, the system will highlight the Light” will turn off once the system established for the tire size equipped on tire or tires with insufficient pressure receives the updated tire pressures. The your vehicle. Undesirable system operation graphically, and an acoustic signal will be vehicle may need to be driven for up to or sensor damage may result when using emitted. replacement equipment that is not of the 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in same size, type, and/or style. The TPM In this case, stop the vehicle, check the order for the TPMS to receive this sensor is not designed for use on inflation pressure of each tire, and inflate information. aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a the necessary tire or tires to the correct Operating Example poor overall system performance or sensor cold inflation pressure value, shown on damage. Customers are encouraged to use the display or in the dedicated TPMS For example, your vehicle may have a OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature menu. recommended cold (parked for more than operation. three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi TPMS TEMPORARILYDISABLED (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Check Message 68°F (20°C), and the measured tire (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a When a system fault is detected, the “Tire using an aftermarket tire sealant it is Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will recommended that you take your vehicle to decrease the tire pressure to your authorized dealer to have your sensor flash on and off for 75 seconds, and then approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire function checked. remain on solid. The system fault will also pressure is low enough to turn on the sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, After inspecting or adjusting the tire this sequence will repeat, provided that “Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light.” pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire the system fault still exists. The “Tire This will prevent moisture and dirt from Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi entering the valve stem, which could damage (193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure the TPMS sensor. turn off when the fault condition no Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. longer exists. A system fault can occur In this situation, the “Tire Pressure due to any of the following: Monitoring Warning Light” will turn off Jamming due to electronic devices or only after the tires are inflated to the driving next to facilities emitting the vehicle’s recommended cold placard same radio frequencies as the TPMS pressure value. sensors.

97 Installing some form of aftermarket Beginning with the next ignition switch The TPMS is not a substitute for window tinting that affects radio wave cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or proper tire maintenance, and it is the signals. display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” driver’s responsibility to maintain message in the instrument cluster. correct tire pressure using an accurate Accumulation of snow or ice around Instead, dashes (--) will remain in place of tire pressure gauge, even if SAFETY the wheels or wheel housings. the pressure values. underinflation has not reached the level Using tire chains on the vehicle. To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”. Using wheels/tires not equipped with wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with TPMS sensors. tires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, Seasonal temperature changes will drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes After the punctured tire has been affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will repaired with the original tire sealant monitor the actual tire pressure in the chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on contained in the Tire Repair Kit, the tire. and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. previous condition must be restored so The instrument cluster will display the General Information that the warning light is off during “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and normal driving. then display pressure values in place of the The following regulatory statement TPMS Deactivation dashes. On the next ignition switch cycle applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: The TPMS can be deactivated by the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will replacing all four wheel and tire no longer be displayed, as long as no This device complies with Part 15 of the assemblies (road tires) with wheel and system fault exists. FCC rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Note: Sensors, such as when installing winter following two conditions: wheel and tire assemblies on your The TPMS is not intended to replace (1) This device may not cause harmful vehicle. normal tire care and maintenance, or to interference. To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all provide warning of a tire failure or (2) This device must accept any four wheel and tire assemblies (road condition. interference received, including tires) with tires not equipped with Tire The TPMS should not be used as a interference that may cause undesired Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. tire pressure gauge while adjusting your operation. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes tire pressure. Note: Changes or modifications not above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will expressly approved by the party chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash Driving on a significantly responsible for compliance could void the on and off for 75 seconds and then underinflated tire will cause the tire to user’s authority to operate the remain on. The instrument cluster will overheat, and can lead to tire failure. equipment. display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” Underinflation also reduces fuel message and then display dashes (--) in efficiency and tire tread life, and may place of the pressure values. affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. 98 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle SYSTEMS a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in needs to be modified to accommodate a the front passenger seat, move the seat disabled person, refer to the “Customer Some of the most important safety as far back as possible and use the Assistance” section for customer service features in your vehicle are the restraint proper child restraint (refer to “Child contact information. systems: Restraints” in this section for further Occupant Restraint Systems Features information). Seat Belt Systems 3. Children that are not big enough to Warning! wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer Supplemental Restraint Systems to “Child Restraints” in this section for (SRS) Air Bags Never place a rear-facing child restraint in further information) should be secured in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Child Restraints a vehicle with a rear seat in child front air bag can cause death or serious restraints or belt-positioning booster Some of the safety features described in injury to a child 12 years or younger, seats. Older children who do not use child including a child in a rear-facing child this section may be standard equipment restraints or belt-positioning booster restraint. on some models, or may be optional seats should ride properly buckled up in a Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a equipment on others. If you are not sure, vehicle with a rear seat. ask your authorized dealer. vehicle with a rear seat. 4. Never allow children to slide the Important Safety Precautions shoulder belt behind them or under their Seat Belt Systems Please pay close attention to the arm. information in this section. It tells you Buckle up even though you are an how to use your restraint system 5. Youshould read the instructions excellent driver, even on short trips. properly, to keep you and your provided with your child restraint to Someone on the road may be a poor passengers as safe as possible. make sure that you are using it properly. driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away Here are some simple steps you can take 6. All occupants should always wear from home or on your own street. to minimize the risk of harm from a their lap and shoulder belts properly. deploying air bag: Research has shown that seat belts save 7. The driver and front passenger seats lives, and they can reduce the 1. Children 12 years old and under should be moved back as far as practical seriousness of injuries in a collision. should always ride buckled up in a vehicle to allow the front air bags room to inflate. Some of the worst injuries happen when with a rear seat. people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat 8. Do not lean against the door or belts reduce the possibility of ejection window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and the risk of injury caused by striking and deployment occurs, the side air bags the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a will inflate forcefully into the space motor vehicle should be belted at all between occupants and the door and times. occupants could be injured. 99 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder (the outboard front passenger seat Lap/Shoulder Belts System (BeltAlert) BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The All seating positions in your vehicle are Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if BeltAlert warning sequence starts by equipped with lap/shoulder belts. equipped) – No Deactivation blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and The seat belt webbing retractor will lock SAFETY BeltAlert is a feature intended to sounding an intermittent chime. Once the only during very sudden stops or remind the driver and outboard front BeltAlert warning sequence has collisions. This feature allows the seat passenger (if equipped with completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light shoulder part of the seat belt to move outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) will remain on until the seat belts are freely with you under normal conditions. to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence However, in a collision the seat belt will feature is active whenever the ignition may repeat based on vehicle speed until lock and reduce your risk of striking the switch is in the START or ON/RUN the driver and occupied outboard front inside of the vehicle or being thrown out position. seat passenger seat belts are buckled. of the vehicle. The driver should instruct all occupants Initial Indication to buckle their seat belts. Warning! If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or Change of Status ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a If the driver or outboard front seat Relying on the air bags alone could lead to few seconds. If the driver or outboard passenger (if equipped with outboard more severe injuries in a collision. The air front seat passenger (if equipped with front passenger seat BeltAlert) bags work with your seat belt to restrain you outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the properly. In some collisions, the air bags is unbuckled when the ignition switch is vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. first in the START or ON/RUN position sequence will begin until the seat belts the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on are buckled again. In a collision, you and your passengers can and remain on until both outboard front The outboard front passenger seat suffer much greater injuries if you are not seat belts are buckled. The outboard BeltAlert is not active when the outboard properly buckled up. Youcan strike the front passenger seat BeltAlert is not interior of your vehicle or other passengers, front passenger seat is unoccupied. or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. active when an outboard front passenger BeltAlert may be triggered when an Always be sure you and others in your vehicle seat is unoccupied. animal or other items are placed on the are buckled up properly. BeltAlert Warning Sequence outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, The BeltAlert warning sequence is recommended that pets be restrained in activated when the vehicle is moving people riding in these areas are more likely the rear seat (if equipped) in pet to be seriously injured or killed. above a specified vehicle speed range harnesses or pet carriers that are and the driver or outboard front seat secured by seat belts, and cargo is Do not allow people to ride in any area of passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with properly stowed. your vehicle that is not equipped with seats outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) and seat belts. 100 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating seat and using a seat belt properly. buckle will not protect you properly. The lap Instructions Occupants, including the driver, should portion could ride too high on your body, always wear their seat belts whether or not possibly causing internal injuries. Always 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. an air bag is also provided at their seating buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest Sit back and adjust the seat. position to minimize the risk of severe injury you. or death in the event of a crash. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the A seat belt that is too loose will not back of the front seat, and next to your Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you make your injuries in a collision much worse. could move too far forward, increasing the arm in the rear seat (for vehicles Youmight suffer internal injuries, or you possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow snugly. latch plate and pull out the seat belt. these instructions to wear your seat belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as safely and to keep your passengers safe, A seat belt that is worn under your arm is far as necessary to allow the seat belt to too. dangerous. Yourbody could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, go around your lap. Two people should never be belted into a increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt 3. When the seat belt is long enough to single seat belt. People belted together can worn under the arm can cause internal fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle crash into one another in a collision, hurting injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder until you hear a “click.” belt or a lap belt for more than one person, so that your strongest bones will take the no matter what their size. force in a collision. A shoulder belt placed behind you will not Warning! protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used A lap belt worn too high can increase the together. risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart bones, but across your abdomen. Always in a collision and leave you with no wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as protection. Inspect the seat belt system possible and keep it snug. periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose 06046S0001NA parts. Damaged parts must be replaced Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into Seat A twisted seat belt may not protect you immediately. Do not disassemble or modify Belt Buckle properly. In a collision, it could even cut into the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug must be replaced after a collision. body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a and lies low across your hips, below your seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt authorized dealer immediately and have it portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To fixed. loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug 101 seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under Second Row Center Seat Belt detach from the lower anchor when the the seat belt in a collision. Operating Instructions seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be stored out 5. Position the shoulder belt across the of the way in the parcel tray for added shoulder and chest with minimal, if any convenience to open up utilization of the SAFETY slack so that it is comfortable and not storage areas behind the front seats resting on your neck. The retractor will when the seat is not occupied. withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. 1. Remove the mini-latch plate and 6. To release the seat belt, push the red regular latch plate from its stowed button on the buckle. The seat belt will position in the right rear side trim panel. automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch 2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the plate down the webbing to allow the seat seat belt over the seat. belt to retract fully. 3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting of the right head restraint. Procedure 4. When the seat belt is long enough to Use the following procedure to untwist a fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the twisted lap/shoulder belt. mini-buckle until you hear a “click.” 1. Position the latch plate as close as 5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch possible to the anchor point. plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) lap. above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create 6. When the seat belt is long enough to a fold that begins immediately above the 06056S0002EM fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle Second Row Seat Belts latch plate. until you hear a “click.” 1 — Seat Belt Buckle 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the 7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug 2 — Seat Belt Latch Plate and lies low across your hips, below your folded webbing. The folded webbing 3 — Mini Latch Plate must enter the slot at the top of the latch 4 — Mini Seat Belt Buckle abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt plate. 5 — Mini Buckle Release portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the until it clears the folded webbing and the The second row center seat belt features risk of sliding under the seat belt in a seat belt is no longer twisted. a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and collision. buckle, which allows the seat belt to 102 8. Position the shoulder belt on your Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Note: These devices are not a substitute chest so that it is comfortable and not for proper seat belt placement by the resting on your neck. The retractor will occupant. The seat belt still must be worn withdraw any slack in the seat belt. snugly and positioned properly. 9. To release the seat belt, push the red The pretensioners are triggered by the button on the buckle. Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are 10. To disengage the mini-latch plate single use items. A deployed from the mini-buckle for storage, insert pretensioner or a deployed air bag must the regular latch plate into the black be replaced immediately. button on the top of the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its 0226075266 Energy Management Feature Pregnant Women And Seat Belts stowed position. If necessary, slide the The front seat belt system is equipped latch plate down the webbing to allow the Seat belts must be worn by all occupants with an Energy Management feature that seat belt to retract fully. Insert the including pregnant women: the risk of may help further reduce the risk of injury mini-latch plate and regular latch plate injury in the event of an accident is in the event of a collision. The seat belt into its stowed position. reduced for the mother and the unborn system has a retractor assembly that is child if they are wearing a seat belt. designed to release webbing in a Position the lap belt snug and low below controlled manner. Warning! the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt Switchable Automatic Locking If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are across the chest and away from the neck. Retractors (ALR) Never place the shoulder belt behind the not properly connected when the seat belt is The seat belts in the passenger seating used by an occupant, the seat belt will not be back or under the arm. able to provide proper restraint and will positions are equipped with a Switchable increase the risk of injury in a collision. Seat Belt Pretensioner Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. When reattaching the mini-latch plate The front seat belt system is equipped For additional information, refer to and mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt with pretensioning devices that are “Installing Child Restraints Using The webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is designed to remove slack from the seat Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child twisted, follow the preceding procedure to belt in the event of a collision. These detach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, Restraints” section of this manual. The untwist the webbing, and reattach the devices may improve the performance of figure below illustrates the locking mini-latch plate and mini-buckle. the seat belt by removing slack from the feature for each seating position. seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. 103 Warning! Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in The seat belt assembly must be replaced SAFETY front of an air bag. A deploying passenger if the switchable Automatic Locking front air bag can cause death or serious Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat injury to a child 12 years or younger, belt function is not working properly when including a child in a rear-facing child checked according to the procedures in the

06086S0102NA restraint. Service Manual. ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a Failure to replace the seat belt assembly Retractor vehicle with a rear seat. could increase the risk of injury in collisions. If the passenger seating position is Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode equipped with an ALR and is being used How To Engage The Automatic Locking to restrain occupants who are wearing the for normal usage, only pull the seat belt Mode seat belt or children who are using booster webbing out far enough to comfortably seats. The locked mode is only used to install wrap around the occupant’s mid-section 1. Buckle the combination lap and rear-facing or forward-facing child so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR shoulder belt. restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. is activated, you will hear a clicking sound 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull as the seat belt retracts. Allow the downward until the entire seat belt is webbing to retract completely in this extracted. Supplemental Restraint Systems case and then carefully pull out only the (SRS) 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the amount of webbing necessary to Some of the safety features described in seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking comfortably wrap around the occupant’s this section may be standard equipment sound. This indicates the seat belt is now mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the on some models, or may be optional in the Automatic Locking Mode. buckle until you hear a "click." equipment on others. If you are not sure, In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder How To Disengage The Automatic ask your authorized dealer. Locking Mode belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat The air bag system must be ready to belt will still retract to remove any slack Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder protect you in a collision. The Occupant in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic belt and allow it to retract completely to Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is disengage the Automatic Locking Mode internal circuits and interconnecting installed in a seating position that has a and activate the vehicle sensitive wiring associated with the electrical Air seat belt with this feature. Children (emergency) locking mode. Bag System Components. Yourvehicle 12 years old and under should always be may be equipped with the following Air properly restrained in a vehicle with a Bag System Components: rear seat. 104 Air Bag System Components The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Note: If the speedometer, tachometer, Light in the instrument panel for or any engine related gauges are not Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) approximately four to eight seconds for a working, the Occupant Restraint Air Bag Warning Light self-check when the ignition switch is Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In first in the ON/RUN position. After the this condition the air bags may not be Steering Wheel and Column self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will ready to inflate for your protection. Have Instrument Panel turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction an authorized dealer service the air bag in any part of the system, it turns on the system immediately. Knee Impact Bolsters Air Bag Warning Light, either Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light Warning! Supplemental Side Air Bags comes on again after initial startup. Supplemental Knee Air Bags The ORC also includes diagnostics that Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your will illuminate the instrument panel Air instrument panel could mean you won’t have Front and Side Impact Sensors Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is the air bag system to protect you in a Seat Belt Pretensioners detected that could affect the air bag collision. If the light does not come on as a system. The diagnostics also record the bulb check when the ignition is first turned Seat Track Position Sensors nature of the malfunction. While the air on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized Seat Belt Buckle Switch bag system is designed to be dealer service the air bag system maintenance free, if any of the following immediately. Air Bag Warning Light occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Redundant Air Bag Warning Light The ORC monitors the readiness The Air Bag Warning Light does not of the electronic parts of the air bag come on during the four to eight seconds system whenever the ignition switch is in when the ignition switch is first in the If a fault with the Air Bag Warning the START or ON/RUN position. If the ON/RUN position. Light is detected, which could affect the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), The Air Bag Warning Light remains on the ACC position, the air bag system is the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will after the four to eight-second interval. not on and the air bags will not inflate. illuminate on the instrument panel. The The ORC contains a backup power supply The Air Bag Warning Light comes on Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will system that may deploy the air bag intermittently or remains on while stay on until the fault is cleared. In system even if the battery loses power or driving. addition, a single chime will sound to alert it becomes disconnected prior to you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning deployment. Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an 105 authorized dealer service the vehicle Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag immediately. For additional information Features regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to “Warning Lights And The Advanced Front Air Bag system has Messages” in the “Getting To Know Your multistage driver and front passenger air SAFETY Instrument Panel” section of this manual. bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of Front Air Bags collision as determined by the Occupant This vehicle has front air bags and Restraint Controller (ORC), which may lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and receive information from the front front passenger. The front air bags are a impact sensors (if equipped) or other 06106S0002EM system components. supplement to the seat belt restraint Passenger Air Bag systems. The driver front air bag is The first stage inflator is triggered mounted in the center of the steering immediately during an impact that wheel. The passenger front air bag is Warning! requires air bag deployment. A low mounted in the instrument panel, above energy output is used in less severe the glove compartment. The words “SRS collisions. A higher energy output is used AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on Being too close to the steering wheel or for more severe collisions. the air bag covers. instrument panel during front air bag This vehicle may be equipped with a deployment could cause serious injury, driver and/or front passenger seat belt including death. Air bags need room to buckle switch that detects whether the inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or driver or front passenger seat belt is instrument panel. buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Never place a rear-facing child restraint Front Air Bags. in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious This vehicle may be equipped with driver injury to a child 12 years or younger, and/or front passenger seat track including a child in a rear-facing child position sensors that may adjust the restraint. inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a Bags based upon seat position. 06106S0001EM Driver Air Bag vehicle with a rear seat.

106 On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may Warning! Warning! deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a No objects should be placed over or near severe initial deceleration. Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee the air bag on the instrument panel or Because air bag sensors measure vehicle impact bolsters in any way. steering wheel because any such objects deceleration over time, vehicle speed and could cause harm if the vehicle is in a Do not mount any accessories to the knee damage by themselves are not good impact bolsters such as alarm lights, collision severe enough to cause the air bag indicators of whether or not an air bag to inflate. stereos, citizen band radios, etc. should have deployed. Do not put anything on or around the air Seat belts are necessary for your Supplemental Driver And Front bag covers or attempt to open them protection in all collisions, and also are manually. Youmay damage the air bags and Passenger Knee Air Bags you could be injured because the air bags needed to help keep you in position, away may no longer be functional. The protective from an inflating air bag. This vehicle is equipped with a covers for the air bag cushions are designed When the ORC detects a collision Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag to open only when the air bags are inflating. requiring the front air bags, it signals the mounted in the instrument panel below Relying on the air bags alone could lead to inflator units. A large quantity of the steering column and a Supplemental more severe injuries in a collision. The air non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the bags work with your seat belt to restrain you front air bags. instrument panel below the glove properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t The steering wheel hub trim cover and compartment. The Supplemental Knee deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts the upper right side of the instrument Air Bags provide enhanced protection even though you have air bags. panel separate and fold out of the way as during a frontal impact by working the air bags inflate to their full size. The together with the seat belts, Front Air Bag Operation front air bags fully inflate in less time pretensioners, and front air bags. than it takes to blink your eyes. The front Front Air Bags are designed to provide air bags then quickly deflate while additional protection by supplementing helping to restrain the driver and front the seat belts. Front air bags are not passenger. expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front Knee Impact Bolsters air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect produce substantial vehicle damage — the knees of the driver and front for example, some pole collisions, passenger, and position the front underrides, and angle offset collisions. occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags. 06096S0102NA Driver Knee Air Bag 107 The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body SAFETY structure. When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space

06096S0103NA between the occupant and the door. The 06106S0005EM Front Passenger Knee Air Bag SAB moves at a very high speed and with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable such a high force that it could injure Curtain (SABIC) Label Location Supplemental Side Air Bags occupants if they are not seated SABICs may help reduce the risk of head properly, or if items are positioned in the Yourvehicle is equipped with two types or other injuries to front and rear seat area where the SAB inflates. Children are of side air bags: outboard occupants in certain side at an even greater risk of injury from a impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in 1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air deploying air bag. Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard addition to the injury reduction potential side of the front seats. The SABs are provided by the seat belts and body marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or structure. Warning! “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard The SABICs deploy downward, covering side of the seats. the side windows. An inflating SABIC Do not use accessory seat covers or place pushes the outside edge of the trim out objects between you and the Side Air Bags; of the way and covers the window. The the performance could be adversely SABICs inflate with enough force to affected and/or objects could be pushed into injure occupants if they are not belted you, causing serious injury. and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs 2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable inflate. Children are at an even greater Curtains (SABICs): Located above the risk of injury from a deploying air bag. side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” 06106S0004EM Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag 108 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could Warning! Warning! lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Do not stack luggage or other cargo up Occupants, including children, who are up Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your high enough to block the deployment of the seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. SABICs. The trim covering above the side against or very close to Side Air Bags can be windows where the SABIC and its seriously injured or killed. Occupants, deployment path are located should remain including children, should never lean on or Note: Air bag covers may not be obvious free from any obstructions. sleep against the door, side windows, or area in the interior trim, but they will open where the side air bags inflate, even if they In order for the SABICs to work as are in an infant or child restraint. during air bag deployment. intended, do not install any accessory items Side Impacts in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your In side impacts, the side impact sensors not add an aftermarket sunroof to your aid the ORC in determining the vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require protection in all collisions. They also help permanent attachments (bolts or screws) keep you in position, away from an inflating appropriate response to impact events. for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from The system is calibrated to deploy the drill into the roof of the vehicle for any the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their Side Air Bags on the impact side of the reason. seat belts properly and sit upright with their vehicle during impacts that require Side backs against the seats. Children must be Air Bag occupant protection. In side properly restrained in a child restraint or impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are booster seat that is appropriate for the size designed to activate in certain side of the child. independently; a left side impact deploys impacts and certain rollover events. The the left Side Air Bags only and a right side Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) impact deploys the right Side Air Bags determines whether the deployment of Warning! only. the Side Air Bags in a particular side The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all impact or rollover event is appropriate, side collisions, including some collisions Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not based on the severity and type of at certain angles, or some side collisions lean against the door or window. Sit upright that do not impact the area of the collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a in the center of the seat. good indicator of whether or not Side Air passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags should have deployed. Being too close to the Side Air Bags Bags may deploy during angled or offset during deployment could cause you to be frontal collisions where the front air bags Side Air Bags are a supplement to the severely injured or killed. deploy. seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes.

109 Rollover Events Instrument Panel As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles Side Air Bags are designed to activate in Knee Impact Bolsters certain rollover events. The ORC are a normal by-product of the process determines whether the deployment of Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles SAFETY the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover Supplemental Side Air Bags event is appropriate, based on the may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or severity and type of collision. Vehicle Supplemental Knee Air Bags throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose damage by itself is not a good indicator Front and Side Impact Sensors of whether or not Side Air Bags should or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If have deployed. Seat Belt Pretensioners the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all Seat Track Position Sensors rollover events. The rollover sensing follow the garment manufacturer’s system determines if a rollover event Seat Belt Buckle Switch instructions for cleaning. may be in progress and whether If A Deployment Occurs Do not drive your vehicle after the air deployment is appropriate. In the event bags have deployed. If you are involved in the vehicle experiences a rollover or near The front air bags are designed to deflate another collision, the air bags will not be rollover event, and deployment of the immediately after deployment. in place to protect you. Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover Note: Front and/or side air bags will not sensing system will also deploy the seat deploy in all collisions. This does not belt pretensioners on both sides of the mean something is wrong with the air bag Warning! vehicle. system. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of If you do have a collision which deploys Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners partial or complete ejection of vehicle the air bags, any or all of the following cannot protect you in another collision. Have occupants through side windows in may occur: the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the certain rollover or side impact events. The air bag material may sometimes seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to monitors the internal circuits and Occupant Restraint Controller System the occupants as the air bags deploy and serviced as well. interconnecting wiring associated with unfold. The abrasions are similar to electrical Air Bag System Components friction rope burns or those you might get Note: listed below: sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. Air Bag System Components They are not caused by contact with Air bag covers may not be obvious in chemicals. They are not permanent and the interior trim, but they will open Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) normally heal quickly. However, if you during air bag deployment. haven’t healed significantly within a few Air Bag Warning Light After any collision, the vehicle should days, or if you have any blistering, see be taken to an authorized dealer Steering Wheel and Column your doctor immediately. immediately. 110 Enhanced Accident Response –Automatic transmission gear System selector Customer Action Customer Will See –Horn In the event of an impact, if the Note: communication network remains intact, –Front wiper Each step MUST BE held for at least two and the power remains intact, depending seconds –Headlamp washer pump on the nature of the event, the ORC will 1. Turn ignition determine whether to have the Enhanced Enhanced Accident Response STOP/OFF/LOCK. Accident Response System perform the System Reset Procedure (Turn Signal Must be following functions: placed in Neutral State). Cut off fuel to the engine. After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff Right turn light 2. Turn ignition Flash hazard lights as long as the is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from BLINKS. MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. battery has power or until the hazard ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/ Left turn light is OFF. light button is pressed. The hazard lights RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. can be deactivated by pressing the Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks Right turn light is ON hazard light button. in the engine compartment and on the 3. Turn right turn SOLID. ground near the engine compartment and signal switch ON. Left turn light Turn on the interior lights, which BLINKS. remain on as long as the battery has fuel tank before resetting the system and power or for 15 minutes from the starting the engine. Right turn light is 4. Place turn signal in OFF. intervention of the Enhanced Accident Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in neutral state. Left turn light Response System. BLINKS. the instrument panel, may both be Unlock the power door locks. blinking and will continue to blink. In order Right turn light Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater (if to move your vehicle to the side of the 5. Turn left turn signal BLINKS. equipped). road, you must follow the system reset switch ON. Left turn light is ON procedure. SOLID. Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor. Right turn light 6. Place turn signal in BLINKS. Cut off battery power to the: neutral state. Left turn light is OFF. –Engine Right turn light is ON –Electric power steering 7. Turn right turn SOLID. –Brake booster signal switch ON. Left turn light BLINKS. –Electric park brake

111 Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR) Customer Action Customer Will See This vehicle is equipped with an event Note: data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of Each step MUST BE held for at least two Warning! an EDR is to record, in certain crash or SAFETY seconds near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road Right turn light is Modifications to any part of the air bag obstacle, data that will assist in 8. Place turn signal in OFF. system could cause it to fail when you need neutral state. Left turn light it. Youcould be injured if the air bag system understanding how a vehicle’s systems BLINKS. is not there to protect you. Do not modify the performed. The EDR is designed to components or wiring, including adding any record data related to vehicle dynamics Right turn light is ON kind of badges or stickers to the steering and safety systems for a short period of 9. Turn left turn signal SOLID. wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side time, typically 30 seconds or less. The switch ON. Left turn light is ON of the instrument panel. Do not modify the EDR in this vehicle is designed to record SOLID. front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add such data as: aftermarket side steps or running boards. 10. Turn left turn How various systems in your vehicle signal switch OFF. Right turn light is It is dangerous to try to repair any part were operating; (Turn Signal Switch OFF. of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell Must be placed in Left turn light is OFF. anyone who works on your vehicle that it has Whether or not the driver and Neutral State). an air bag system. passenger safety belts were 11. Turn ignition Do not attempt to modify any part of buckled/fastened; STOP/OFF/LOCK. your air bag system. The air bag may inflate How far (if at all) the driver was accidentally or may not function properly if 12. Turn ignition modifications are made. Take your vehicle to depressing the accelerator and/or brake MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. an authorized dealer for any air bag system pedal; and, (Entire sequence System is now reset service. If your seat, including your trim needs to be How fast the vehicle was traveling. and the engine may cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in completed within one These data can help provide a better be started. any way (including removal or minute or sequence loosening/tightening of seat attachment understanding of the circumstances in will need to be bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized which crashes and injuries occur. repeated). dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat Note: EDR data are recorded by your accessories may be used. If it is necessary Turn hazard flashers vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation to modify the air bag system for persons OFF (Manually). occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR with disabilities, contact your authorized under normal driving conditions and no If a reset procedure step is not dealer. personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, completed within 60 seconds, then the and crash location) are recorded. turn signal lights will blink and the reset However, other parties, such as law procedure must be performed again in enforcement, could combine the EDR order to be successful. 112 data with the type of personally available. According to crash statistics, Carefully read and follow all the identifying data routinely acquired during children are safer when properly instructions and warnings in the child a crash investigation. restrained in the rear seats rather than in restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the To read data recorded by an EDR, special the front. labels attached to the child restraint. equipment is required, and access to the Before buying any restraint system, vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition make sure that it has a label certifying to the vehicle manufacturer, other Warning! that it meets all applicable Safety parties, such as law enforcement, that Standards. Youshould also make sure have the special equipment, can read the In a collision, an unrestrained child can that you can install it in the vehicle where information if they have access to the become a projectile inside the vehicle. The you will use it. vehicle or the EDR. force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not Note: Child Restraints hold the child, no matter how strong you are. For additional information, refer to Everyone in your vehicle needs to be The child and others could be badly injured. www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or buckled up at all times, including babies Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a call: 1–888–327–4236 and children. Every state in the United proper restraint for the child’s size. States, and every Canadian province, Canadian residents should refer to requires that small children ride in proper There are different sizes and types of Transport Canada’s website for additional restraint systems. This is the law, and you restraints for children from newborn size information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/ can be prosecuted for ignoring it. to the child almost large enough for an eng/motorvehiclesafety/ safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm Children 12 years or younger should ride adult safety belt. Always check the child properly buckled up in a rear seat, if seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Infants and Toddlers who have not reached the height or weight Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of limits of their child restraint the vehicle Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a Small Children have out-grown the height or weight limit of five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear their rear-facing child restraint seat of the vehicle

113 Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle Larger Children forward-facing child restraint, but are too small seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

SAFETY to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the Children Too Large for Child Restraints out-grown the height or weight limit of their vehicle booster seat

Infant And Child Restraints a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by Warning! Safety experts recommend that children the child seat. ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they All children whose weight or height is are two years old or until they reach Never place a rear-facing child restraint above the forward-facing limit for the either the height or weight limit of their in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger child seat should use a belt-positioning rear-facing child restraint. Two types of front air bag can cause death or serious booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts child restraints can be used rear-facing: injury to a child 12 years or younger, fit properly. If the child cannot sit with infant carriers and convertible child including a child in a rear-facing child knees bent over the vehicle’s seat seats. restraint. cushion while the child’s back is against The infant carrier is only used rear-facing Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a the seatback, they should use a in the vehicle. It is recommended for vehicle with a rear seat. belt-positioning booster seat. The child children from birth until they reach the and belt-positioning booster seat are weight or height limit of the infant carrier. held in the vehicle by the seat belt. Convertible child seats can be used either Older Children And Child Restraints rear-facing or forward-facing in the Children who are two years old or who vehicle. Convertible child seats often have outgrown their rear-facing Warning! have a higher weight limit in the convertible child seat can ride rear-facing direction than infant carriers forward-facing in the vehicle. do, so they can be used rear-facing by Improper installation can lead to failure Forward-facing child seats and of an infant or child restraint. It could come children who have outgrown their infant convertible child seats used in the carrier but are still less than at least two loose in a collision. The child could be badly forward-facing direction are for children injured or killed. Follow the child restraint years old. Children should remain who are over two years old or who have manufacturer’s directions exactly when rear-facing until they reach the highest outgrown the rear-facing weight or installing an infant or child restraint. weight or height allowed by their height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with 114 After a child restraint is installed in the against the seatback, should use the seat booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat forward or rearward because it can loosen test to decide whether the child can use belt fit periodically and make sure the the child restraint attachments. Remove the the vehicle’s seat belt alone: seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s child restraint before adjusting the vehicle squirming or slouching can move the belt seat position. When the vehicle seat has 1. Can the child sit all the way back out of position. If the shoulder belt been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. against the back of the vehicle seat? contacts the face or neck, move the child When your child restraint is not in use, 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably closer to the center of the vehicle, or use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or over the front of the vehicle seat – while a booster seat to position the seat belt LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the they are still sitting all the way back? on the child correctly. vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious child’s shoulder between their neck and personal injury. arm? Warning! 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as Children Too Large For Booster possible, touching the child’s thighs and Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt Seats not their stomach? under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child Children who are large enough to wear 5. Can the child stay seated like this for properly, which may result in serious injury or the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose the whole trip? death. A child must always wear both the lap legs are long enough to bend over the and shoulder portions of the seat belt If the answer to any of these questions correctly. front of the seat when their back is was “no,” then the child still needs to use a Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below Combined Weight LATCH – Lower Restraint Type of the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Restraint Anchors Only Tether Anchor Tether Anchor Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X Restraint Rear-Facing Child Morethan65lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg)

115 Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below Combined Weight LATCH – Lower Restraint Type of the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Restraint Anchors Only Tether Anchor

SAFETY Tether Anchor Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X Restraint Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg)

Lower Anchors And Tethers For for installing LATCH-equipped child LATCH Positions For Installing Child CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System seats. There are two lower anchorages Restraints In This Vehicle located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower 022668173 anchorages. In these seating positions, LATCH Label the seat belt must be used with the top Yourvehicle is equipped with the child tether anchorage to install the child 06086S0101NA restraint anchorage system called restraint. Please see the following table LATCH Positions LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors for more information. Lower Anchorage Symbol and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) system has three vehicle anchor points TopTether Anchorage Symbol

116 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt of the child restraint) for using the LATCH 65 lbs (29.5 kg) and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system anchorage system to attach the child restraint? once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. used together to attach a rear-facing or No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH forward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information. Can a child seat be installed in the center Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a position using the inner LATCH lower No child seat in the center seating position. anchorage? Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower Can two child restraints be attached using a No anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child common lower LATCH anchorage? seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes manufacturer also allows contact. See your back of the front passenger seat? child restraint owner’s manual for more information. The rear outboard head restraints can be Can the head restraints be removed? Yes removed.

117 Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Forward-facing child restraints and some Anchorages rear-facing child restraints will also be The lower anchorages equipped with a tether strap. The tether are round bars that are There are tether strap strap will have a hook at the end to attach found at the rear of the anchorages behind each to the top tether anchorage and a way to SAFETY seat cushion where it rear seating position tighten the strap after it is attached to meets the seatback, located in the panel the anchorage. below the anchorage between the rear symbols on the seatback and the rear Center Seat LATCH seatback. They are just window. They are found visible when you lean into the rear seat to under a plastic cover install the child restraint. Youwill easily with the tether anchorage symbol on it. Warning! feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position. Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible 06086S0104NA Child Restraint System” for typical Upper Tether Anchorage Location installation instructions. LATCH-compatible child restraint 06086S0009EM LATCH Anchorage Locations systems will be equipped with a rigid bar Always follow the directions of the child or a flexible strap on each side. Each will restraint manufacturer when installing 1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar have a hook or connector to attach to the your child restraint. Not all child restraint 2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations lower anchorage and a way to tighten the systems will be installed as described connection to the anchorage. here.

118 To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and Restraint Warning! downward into the seat. Remove slack in If the selected seating position has a the straps according to the child restraint Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor manufacturer’s instructions. Improper installation of a child restraint (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure following the instructions below. See the 6. Test that the child restraint is of the restraint. The child could be badly section “Installing Child Restraints Using installed tightly by pulling back and forth injured or killed. Follow the child restraint The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type on the child seat at the belt path. It should manufacturer’s directions exactly when of seat belt each seating position has. not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in installing an infant or child restraint. any direction. 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower Child restraint anchorages are designed How To Stow An Unused to withstand only those loads imposed by straps and on the tether strap of the child correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no seat so that you can more easily attach Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt: circumstances are they to be used for adult the hooks or connectors to the vehicle When using the LATCH attaching system seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other anchorages. items or equipment to the vehicle. to install a child restraint, stow all ALR 2. Place the child seat between the seat belts that are not being used by lower anchorages for that seating other occupants or being used to secure Installing Child Restraints Using position. For some second row seats, you child restraints. An unused belt could The Vehicle Seat Belt may need to recline the seat and/or raise injure a child if they play with it and the head restraint to get a better fit. If accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Child restraint systems are designed to the rear seat can be moved forward and Before installing a child restraint using be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. move it to its rear-most position to make behind the child restraint and out of the room for the child seat. Youmay also child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt move the front seat forward to allow interferes with the child restraint Warning! more room for the child seat. installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt Improper installation or failure to 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of through the child restraint belt path and the child restraint to the lower anchorages properly secure a child restraint can lead to then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. failure of the restraint. The child could be in the selected seating position. Remind all children in the vehicle that the badly injured or killed. 4. If the child restraint has a tether seat belts are not toys and that they Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s strap, connect it to the top tether should not play with them. directions exactly when installing an infant anchorage. See the section “Installing or child restraint. Child Restraints Using The TopTether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. 119 The seat belts in the passenger seating retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For positions are equipped with a Switchable a clicking noise while the webbing is Installing Child Restraints In This Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that pulled back into the retractor. Refer to Vehicle is designed to keep the lap portion of the the “Automatic Locking Mode” seat belt tight around the child restraint description in “Switchable Automatic SAFETY so that it is not necessary to use a locking Locking Retractors (ALR)” under clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” “Occupant Restraint Systems” for into a locked mode by pulling all of the additional information on ALR. webbing out of the retractor and then Please see the table below and the letting the webbing retract back into the following sections for more information.

06086S0102NA Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor TopTether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to Weight limit of the Child child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat install a forward facing child restraint, up to the Restraint belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the Yes restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer front passenger seat? also allows contact. Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The rear outboard head restraints can be removed. Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an No against the belt path of the child restraint? ALR retractor.

120 Installing A Child Restraint With A 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle Any seat belt system will loosen with Switchable Automatic Locking until you hear a “click.” time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Retractor (ALR): 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. Child restraint systems are designed to Installing Child Restraints Using be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the The Top Tether Anchorage: the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to Warning! Warning! retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in Do not attach a tether strap for a Improper installation or failure to the Automatic Locking mode. rear-facing car seat to any location in front properly secure a child restraint can lead to of the car seat, including the seat frame or a failure of the restraint. The child could be 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the tether anchorage. Only attach the tether badly injured or killed. retractor. If it is locked, you should not be strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether able to pull out any webbing. If the anchorage that is approved for that seating Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. position, located behind the top of the directions exactly when installing an infant vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors or child restraint. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint to tighten the lap portion around the child System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle. 1. Place the child seat in the center of restraint while you push the child the seating position. For some second restraint rearward and downward into row seats, you may need to recline the the vehicle seat. seat and/or raise the head restraint to 8. If the child restraint has a top tether get a better fit. If the rear seat can be strap and the seating position has a top moved forward and rearward in the tether anchorage, connect the tether vehicle, you may wish to move it to its strap to the anchorage and tighten the rear-most position to make room for the tether strap. See the section “Installing child seat. Youmay also move the front 1. Look behind the seating position Child Restraints Using the TopTether seat forward to allow more room for the where you plan to install the child Anchorage” for directions to attach a child seat. restraint to find the tether anchorage. tether anchor. Youmay need to move the seat forward 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing 9. Test that the child restraint is to provide better access to the tether from the retractor to pass it through the installed tightly by pulling back and forth anchorage. If there is no top tether belt path of the child restraint. Do not on the child seat at the belt path. It should anchorage for that seating position, twist the belt webbing in the belt path. not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in move the child restraint to another any direction. position in the vehicle if one is available. 121 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the 5. Remove slack in the tether strap SAFETY TIPS anchor directly behind the seat where according to the child restraint you are placing the child restraint. manufacturer’s instructions. Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. SAFETY Warning!

Warning! An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the Do not leave children or animals inside anchorage position directly behind the child parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat seat to secure a child restraint top tether build-up may cause serious injury or death. strap. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a 06086S0104NA seat, make sure the tether strap does not Upper Tether Anchorage Location collision, people riding in these areas are slip into the opening between the seatbacks more likely to be seriously injured or killed. 3. Route the tether strap to provide the as you remove slack in the strap. most direct path for the strap between Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats the anchor and the child seat. If your Transporting Pets and seat belts. vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, Air Bags deploying in the front seat could Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a and where possible, route the tether harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be seat and using a seat belt properly. strap under the head restraint and thrown about and possibly injured, or between the two posts. If not possible, injure a passenger during panic braking or lower the head restraint and pass the in a collision. tether strap around the outboard side of Pets should be restrained in the rear seat the head restraint. in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

122 Exhaust Gas Whenever a change is noticed in the collision if they have been damaged (i.e., sound of the exhaust system, when bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If exhaust fumes can be detected inside the there is any question regarding seat belt Warning! vehicle, or when the underside or rear of or retractor condition, replace the seat the vehicle is damaged, have a competent belt. mechanic inspect the complete exhaust Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain Air Bag Warning Light carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and system and adjacent body areas for odorless. Breathing it can make you broken, damaged, deteriorated, or The Air Bag warning light will turn on unconscious and can eventually poison you. mispositioned parts. Open seams or for four to eight seconds as a bulb check To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety loose connections could permit exhaust when the ignition switch is first turned to tips: fumes to seep into the passenger ON/RUN. If the light is either not on Do not run the engine in a closed garage compartment. In addition, inspect the during starting, stays on, or turns on while or in confined areas any longer than needed exhaust system each time the vehicle is to move your vehicle in or out of the area. driving, have the system inspected at an raised for lubrication or oil change. authorized dealer as soon as possible. If you are required to drive with the Replace as required. This light will illuminate with a single trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure Safety Checks YouShould Make Inside chime when a fault with the Air Bag that all windows are closed and the climate Warning Light has been detected, it will control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. The Vehicle DO NOT use the recirculation mode. stay on until the fault is cleared. If the Seat Belts light comes on intermittently or remains If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle on while driving, have an authorized Inspect the seat belt system periodically, with the engine running, adjust your heating dealer service the vehicle immediately. checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. or cooling controls to force outside air into Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. Damaged parts must be replaced “Safety” for further information. immediately. Do not disassemble or The best protection against carbon modify the system. Defroster Front seat belt assemblies must be monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a Check operation by selecting the defrost properly maintained engine exhaust replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a mode and place the blower control on system. high speed. Youshould be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

123 Floor Mat Safety Information replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by for the specific make, model, and year of lightly pulling mat. Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of ONLYuse the driver’s side floor mat on Periodic Safety Checks YouShould SAFETY the pedal assemblies. Only use a floor the driver’s side floor area. To check for Make Outside The Vehicle mat that is securely attached using the interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the Tires floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal of position and interfere with the pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your Examine tires for excessive tread wear assemblies or impair safe operation of floor mat interferes with the operation of and uneven wear patterns. Check for your vehicle in other ways. any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, stones, nails, glass, or other objects remove the floor mat from the vehicle and lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect place the floor mat in your trunk. the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect Warning! ONLYuse the passenger’s side floor mat sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. on the passenger’s side floor area. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or Check the tires (including spare) for An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or slide into the driver’s side floor area when proper cold inflation pressure. stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat the vehicle is moving. Objects can become fasteners may cause your floor mat to trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch Lights interfere with the accelerator, brake, or pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle Have someone observe the operation of control. control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or brake lights and exterior lights while you DEATH: NEVER place any objects under the floor work the controls. Check turn signal and ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects high beam indicator lights on the mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT could change the position of the floor mat instrument panel. install your floor mat upside down or turn and may cause interference with the your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. Door Latches mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. If the vehicle carpet has been removed Check for proper closing, latching, and and re-installed, always properly attach ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR carpet to the floor and check the floor mat locking. MATFROM THE VEHICLE before fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fluid Leaks installing any other floor mat. NEVER install Fully depress each pedal to check for or stack an additional floor mat on top of an interference with the accelerator, brake, or Check area under vehicle after overnight existing floor mat. clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid ONLYinstall floor mats designed to fit It is recommended to only use mild soap leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that and water to clean your floor mats. After detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks cannot be properly attached and secured to cleaning, always check your floor mat has are suspected. The cause should be your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be been properly installed and is secured to located and corrected immediately. 124 STARTING AND OPERATING

Let’s get to the core of the vehicle, and STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 126 see how you can explore its fullest ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE ...... 128 potential. We’ll look at how to drive AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION.....131 safely in any situation, making it a ALFA DNA PRO SELECTOR ...... 136 welcome companion with our comfort ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION and wallets in mind. (AAS) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 139 STOP/START SYSTEM ...... 140 SPEED LIMITER ...... 142 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE CONTROL) ...... 143 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 145 PARK SENSORS SYSTEM ...... 152 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM ...... 156 REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES . .159 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...... 160 VEHICLE LOADING ...... 162 TRAILER TOWING ...... 163 SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING.....163

125 STARTING THE ENGINE Starting Procedure If the vehicle has a discharged battery, Proceed as follows: booster cables may be used to obtain a start Before starting the engine, be sure to from a booster battery or the battery in adjust the seat, the interior rear view 1. Apply the electric park brake and set another vehicle. This type of start can be mirrors, and the door mirrors, and fasten the gear selector to PARK (P) or dangerous if done improperly. Refer to the seat belt correctly. NEUTRAL (N). “Emergency Starting” in “In Case Of Never press the accelerator pedal before Emergency” for further information. starting the engine. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal without If necessary, messages indicating the touching the accelerator. starting procedure can be shown in the 3. Briefly push the ignition button. Caution! display. 4. If the engine doesn't start within a few seconds, you need to repeat the To prevent damage to the starter, do not Warning! procedure. continuously crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds If the problem persists, contact an before trying again. authorized dealer. When leaving the vehicle, always remove STARTING AND OPERATING the key fob from the vehicle and lock your Remote Starting System — If vehicle. Warning! Equipped Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or This system uses the key fob to start the with access to an unlocked vehicle. engine conveniently from outside the Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid Allowing children to be in a vehicle into the throttle body air inlet opening in an vehicle while still maintaining security. unattended is dangerous for a number of attempt to start the vehicle. This could result The system has a range of at least 300 reasons. A child or others could be seriously in flash fire causing serious personal injury. feet (91 meters). or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal Do not attempt to push or tow your The remote starting system also or the transmission gear selector. vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped activates the climate control (if with an automatic transmission cannot be equipped), the heated seats (if equipped), Do not leave the key fob in or near the started this way. Unburned fuel could enter and the heated steering wheel (if vehicle, or in a location accessible to the catalytic converter and once the engine equipped), depending on temperatures children. A child could operate power has started, ignite and damage the windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. outside and inside of the vehicle. converter and vehicle. Do not leave children or animals inside Note: parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat The vehicle must be equipped with an build-up may cause serious injury or death. automatic transmission in order to include remote start. Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce this range. 126 How to use Remote Start Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer If Engine Fails To Start Activation — If Equipped All of the following conditions must be Starting the Engine with Key Fob met before the engine will remote start: When remote start is active and the Battery Run Down or Drained Gear selector in PARK (P). outside ambient temperature is less than If the ignition does not respond when the 39°F (4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer Doors closed. button is pushed, the key fob battery will be enabled. Exiting remote start will Hood closed. might be run down or drained. Therefore, resume previous operation, except if the Trunk closed. the system does not detect the presence Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active. Hazard switch off. of the key fob in the vehicle, and will Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and display a dedicated message. operation will continue. pressed). In this case, follow the instructions Battery at an acceptable charge level. Extended Park Starting outlined in "Starting With A Discharged Key Fob Battery" in the "Getting To Know PANIC button not pushed. If the vehicle has not been started or YourVehicle" chapter, and start the System not disabled from previous driven for at least 35 days, it is advisable engine normally. remote start event. to follow the indications below. Vehicle alarm system indicator To start the engine, proceed as follows: flashing. Warning! Ignition in the OFF mode (if equipped 1. Briefly push the ignition button with keyless ignition system). 2. If the engine does not start, wait five Fuel level meets minimum seconds and let the starter cool down and Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an requirement. then repeat the starting procedure attempt to start the vehicle. This could result Remote Start Comfort Systems — If 3. If the engine does not start after eight in flash fire causing serious personal injury. Equipped attempts, let the starter cool down for at Do not attempt to push or tow your When Remote Start is activated, the least 10 seconds, and then repeat the vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped heated steering wheel and driver heated starting procedure with an automatic transmission cannot be seat features will automatically turn on in If the problem persists, contact your started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine cold weather. authorized dealer. has started, ignite and damage the These features will stay on through the Note: After prolonged vehicle inactivity, converter and vehicle. duration of remote start also until the very difficult starting, that can be noticed If the vehicle has a discharged battery, ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN mode. through rapid fatigue of the starter, booster cables may be used to obtain a start might also be due to a discharged from a booster battery or the battery in battery. In this case, see the "Emergency another vehicle. This type of start can be Starting" section in the "In Case Of dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Emergency" chapter. “Emergency Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. 127 consecutively within a few seconds. The ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE engine will shut down, and the ignition will Caution! be placed in the ON mode The vehicle is equipped with electric park brake to guarantee better use and With the keyless ignition system, it is optimal performance compared to a To prevent damage to the starter, do not possible to go away from the vehicle continuously crank the engine for more than taking the key fob with you, without the manually operated park brake. 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds engine switching off. The vehicle will The electric parking brake features a before trying again. inform about the absence of the key on switch located on the center console, a board, only if the doors are closed. motor with caliper for each rear wheel, After Starting — Warming Up The Stopping the engine (cycling from the ON and an electronic control module. Engine to the STOP position) the accessories are still powered for about three minutes, or Proceed as follows: until a door is opened. Travel slowly, letting the engine run at When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF a reduced RPM, without accelerating mode, the window switches remain active suddenly. for three minutes. Opening a front door STARTING AND OPERATING It is recommended to wait until the will cancel this function. digital engine coolant temperature After severe driving, idle the engine to indicator starts to rise for maximum allow the temperature inside the engine performance. compartment to cool before shutting off the engine. Stopping The Engine 07046S0001EM Cool Down Electric Park Brake Switch To stop the engine, proceed as follows: It is recommended before switching the The electric parking brake can be 1. Park the vehicle in a position that is vehicle off, to keep the engine idling for a engaged in two ways: not dangerous for oncoming traffic. few minutes so that the turbocharger can Manually, by pulling the switch on the 2. Engage the PARK (P) mode. be suitably lubricated. This procedure is center console. particularly recommended after severe Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "Auto 3. With engine idling, push the driving. Park Brake" conditions. START/STOP button on the steering After a full load operation, keep the wheel to STOP the engine. Note: Normally, the electric parking engine idling for three to five minutes brake is engaged automatically when the Note: Do not leave the ignition in ON before switching it off. engine is stopped. This function can be mode when the engine is off. This time allows the lubricating oil and deactivated/activated on the To shut off the engine with vehicle speed the engine coolant to eliminate the Information and Entertainment system greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must excessive heat from combustion by selecting the following items in push and hold the ignition or push the chamber, bearings, inner components and sequence on the main menu: "Settings", START/STOP button three times turbocharger. 128 "Driver Assistance" and "Automatic Disengaging The Electric Park Brake Parking Brake". Manually Caution! In addition to engaging the electric park In order to manually release the park brake, along with steering and positioning brake, the ignition should be in the ON chocks in front of the wheels (when on a With the Electronic Parking Brake failure mode. Press the brake pedal, and then steep slope), you must always place the warning light on, some functions of the push the switch on the center console vehicle in the PARK (P) mode before electric parking brake are deactivated. In briefly. leaving. this case the driver is responsible for brake activation and vehicle parking in complete Noise may be heard from the rear of the Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the safety conditions. vehicle, and a slight movement of the battery must be replaced in order to brake pedal may be detected during unlock the electric park brake. disengagement. If, under exceptional circumstances, the After disengaging the electric parking Engaging The Park Brake Manually use of the brake is required with the brake, the BRAKE warning light on the Briefly pull the switch located on the vehicle in motion, keep the switch on the instrument panel and the light on the center console to manually engage the center console pulled as long as the brake switch will turn off. electric park brake when the vehicle is action is necessary. If the BRAKE warning light on the stationary. The BRAKE warning light may turn on instrument panel remains on with the Noise may be heard from the rear of the with the hydraulic system temporarily electric parking brake disengaged, this vehicle when engaging the electric unavailable, in this case braking is indicates a fault: in this case, contact an parking brake. controlled by the motors. authorized dealer. A slight movement of the brake pedal The brake lights will also automatically may be detected when engaging the turn on in the same way as for normal electric parking brake with the brake braking with the use of the brake pedal. Warning! pedal pressed. Release the switch on the center console With the electric parking brake engaged, to stop the braking action with the the BRAKE warning light on the vehicle in motion. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. instrument panel and the switch will If, through this procedure, the vehicle is illuminate. braked until a speed below 1.9 mph Allowing children to be in a vehicle (3 km/h) is reached and the switch is kept unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously pulled, the park brake will definitively or fatally injured. Children should be warned engage. not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or Note: Driving the vehicle with the the gear selector. electric parking brake engaged, or using Do not leave the key fob in or near the it several times to slow down the vehicle, vehicle or in a location accessible to children. may cause severe damage to the braking A child could operate power windows, other system. controls, or move the vehicle. 129 Be sure the park brake is fully disengaged "Drive Away Release" — if equipped: Safe Hold before driving; failure to do so can lead to the electric park brake will automatically Safe Hold is a safety function that brake failure and a collision. disengage with the driver side seat belt automatically engages the electric park Always fully apply the park brake when fastened and the detection of an action brake in the event of a dangerous leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause performed by the driver to move the condition for the vehicle. damage or injury. vehicle (forward gear or reverse gear). The electric park brake engages "Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed is automatically to prevent vehicle lower than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear movement if: Caution! selector is not in PARK (P) position and The vehicle speed is below 2 mph the driver's intention of leaving the (3 km/h). Never use gear position PARK (P) instead of vehicle is detected, the electric park A transmission operating mode the electric parking brake. Always engage brake will automatically engage to hold different from PARK (P) is activated. the electric parking brake when parking the The driver's seat belt is not fastened. vehicle to prevent injury or damage caused the vehicle in safety conditions. by the unexpected movement of the vehicle. "Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle speed The driver side door is open. is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the electric No attempts to apply pressure on the STARTING AND OPERATING brake pedal have been detected. Electric Park Brake Operating Modes park brake will automatically engage when the gear selector is in PARK (P) The “Safe Hold” function can be The electric park brake may operate as position. The light on the switch located temporarily disabled by pressing the follows: on the center console switches on switch located on the center console and "Dynamic Operating Mode": this mode together with the BRAKE warning light on the brake pedal at the same time, with is activated by pulling the switch the instrument panel when the park brake the vehicle stationary and the driver side repeatedly while driving. is engaged and applied to the wheels. door open. "Static Engagement and Release Each automatic park brake engagement Once disabled, the function will activate Mode": with the vehicle stationary, the can be cancelled by pressing the switch again when the vehicle speed reaches electric park brake can be activated by 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled on the center console and at the same pulling the switch on the center console to STOP and then to ON. time moving the gear selector for the once. On the other hand, push the switch transmission to position PARK (P). and the brake pedal at the same time to disengage the brake.

130 AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION Unintended movement of a vehicle could Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all The vehicle can be equipped with an NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while above idle speed. electronically controlled 8-speed the engine is running. Before exiting a automatic transmission where gear vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift Before shifting into any gear, make sure shifting automatically takes place, the transmission into PARK, and turn the your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. depending on the vehicle usage ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is instantaneous parameters (vehicle Display speed, grade, and accelerator pedal locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against position). unwanted movement. The following information is shown on the The new transmission is an absolute When leaving the vehicle, always make dedicated area of the display: innovation, as it can match the sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, In Automatic Mode: the active mode Stop/Start system with the traditional remove the key fob from the vehicle, and (P,R, N, D) and with "D" the current gear automatic transmissions with built-in lock the vehicle. number. torque converter. For further Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or In Manual Drive Mode (Sequential): information, refer to the “Stop/Start” with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing the mode (M), the current gear and the section within this chapter. children to be in a vehicle unattended is double or single gear shift request, both dangerous for a number of reasons. A child Manual gear shifting can still occur or others could be seriously or fatally injured. up and down (single or double arrow). thanks to the "sequential mode" position Children should be warned not to touch the for the gear selector. parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. Warning! Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or AVVor ON mode. A child could operate NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than power windows, other controls, or move the idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing vehicle. the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or Caution! 07076S0001EM something. Only shift into gear when the Gear Display engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. 131 Gear Selector To select a mode, move the gear selector the - symbol or backward toward forward or backwards, together with the + symbol and the gear is changed. The gear functioning is controlled by the pressing the brake pedal and button to gear selector, which can assume the To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from engage REVERSE (R). following positions: position NEUTRAL (N) to position DRIVE P = PARK (D) or REVERSE (R), the vehicle must be R = REVERSE moving at a low speed or stopped, and the brake pedal must also be pressed. N = NEUTRAL D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed) Note: AutoStick: + manually shift to higher DO NOT accelerate while shifting gear; – manually shift to lower gear from position PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) The positions diagram is illustrated on to another position. the top of the gear selector. After selecting a gear, wait a few seconds before accelerating. This 07076S0005EM precaution is particularly important with Gear Selector engine cold. STARTING AND OPERATING 3 — Gear Selector Button Transmission Operating Modes PARK (P) The gear selector is a joystick style The transmission is locked in this mode. shifting mechanism which returns to the The engine can be started in this mode. center position automatically. It can be Note: Never try to engage PARK (P) pushed forward twice and rearward mode when the vehicle is moving. Before twice, based on the starting condition. 07076S0002EM leaving the vehicle, make sure this mode Gear Selector Center Console The PARK (P) mode can be is engaged (letter P shown on the display enabled/disabled by pushing the PARK and gear selector) and that the park 1 — Gear Selector (P) button. 2 — PARK (P) Button brake is engaged. To transition the vehicle into REVERSE When parking on a flat surface, first (R) mode from DRIVE (D) mode, or into engage the PARK (P) mode and then The letter corresponding to the mode DRIVE (D) mode from REVERSE (R) engage the electric park brake. selected on the gear selector lights up mode, it is necessary to move the gear When parking uphill, before activating and appears on the instrument cluster selector by pushing the gear selector display. the PARK (P) mode, engage the electric button. park brake. Otherwise, it could be When using AutoStick, activate it by difficult to engage the (P) mode. moving the gear selector from DRIVE (D) to the left and then forward toward 132 To check that the PARK (P) mode is When leaving the vehicle, always make NEUTRAL (N) actually engaged, make sure (P) is sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, Use this range when the vehicle is illuminated on the display and on the gear remove the key fob from the vehicle, and standing for prolonged periods with the selector. lock the vehicle. engine running. The engine may be Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or started in this range. Apply the electric Warning! with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing park brake and shift the transmission children to be in a vehicle unattended is into PARK (P) if you must leave the dangerous for a number of reasons. A child vehicle. Never use the PARK position as a or others could be seriously or fatally injured. substitute for the park brake. Always apply Children should be warned not to touch the the park brake fully when parked to guard park brake, brake pedal or the transmission against vehicle movement and possible gear selector. Warning! injury or damage. Do not leave the key fob in or near the Yourvehicle could move and injure you vehicle (or in a location accessible to Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off and others if it is not in PARK. Check by children), and do not leave the ignition in the the ignition to coast down a hill. These are trying to move the gear selector out of PARK ON mode. A child could operate power unsafe practices that limit your response to with the brake pedal released. Make sure the windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. changing traffic or road conditions. You transmission is in PARK before leaving the might lose control of the vehicle and have a vehicle. collision. It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or Caution! NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing DRIVE (D) the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate Before moving the transmission gear Use this mode in normal driving quickly forward or in reverse. Youcould lose selector out of PARK, you must push the conditions. control of the vehicle and hit someone or ignition button to cycle from STOP/OFF Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or something. Only shift into gear when the mode to the ON mode, and also press the engine is idling normally and your foot is REVERSE (R) modes must take place brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear firmly pressing the brake pedal. only after releasing the accelerator selector could result. pedal, with vehicle at a standstill and Unintended movement of a vehicle could DO NOT race the engine when shifting brake pedal pressed. injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear This mode ensures automatic the engine is running. Before exiting a range, as this can damage the drivetrain. engagement of the most suitable gears vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift for driving needs and maximum fuel the transmission into PARK, and turn the REVERSE (R) economy in terms of consumption. ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in Select this mode only with the vehicle at In this position, the transmission shifts the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is the gears automatically, selecting the locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against a standstill. unwanted movement. most suitable for forward driving among those available as you go. In this way the 133 vehicle's optimal driving characteristics Note: are provided for all conditions. To select the correct gear for AutoStick maximum deceleration (engine brake), In the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for just keep the gear paddle pulled (–): the sport driving, when the vehicle is driven transmission goes to an operating mode with a heavy load, on slopes, when towing in which the vehicle can slow down heavy trailers), it is recommended to use easily. the Autostick (sequential shifting) mode The vehicle will keep the gear to select and keep a lower fixed ratio. selected by the driver until the safety In these conditions, the use of a lower conditions allow it. gear improves vehicle performance, 07076S0006EM preventing overheating. Steering Wheel Shift Paddles This means, for example, that the system will try to prevent the engine It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D) Note: If only one manual shift is mode to sequential mode regardless of necessary, the letter (D) will remain on from switching off, automatically vehicle speed. the display with the engaged gear next downshifting if the engine speed is too

STARTING AND OPERATING to it. low. Activation Starting from DRIVE (D), move the Deactivation selector to the left (– and + indication of To deactivate the sequential driving Automatic Transmission Limp Home the trim) to activate the sequential drive mode, bring the gear selector back in Mode mode. The gear engaged will be shown on position DRIVE (D) ("automatic" driving Transmission function is monitored the display. mode). electronically for abnormal conditions. If Shifting is made by moving the gear a condition is detected that could result selector forwards, towards symbol – or in transmission damage, Transmission backwards, towards symbol +. Warning! Limp Home Mode is activated. Steering Wheel Shift Paddles — If In this condition, the transmission stays Equipped in fourth gear, regardless of the selected Do not downshift for additional engine gear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R) The gear can also be manually shifted by braking on a slippery surface. The drive and NEUTRAL (N) still work. using the paddles behind the steering wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle wheel. Pull the right paddle (+) toward the could skid, causing a collision or personal The symbol might light up in the steering wheel and release it to engage a injury. instrument cluster. higher gear, and perform the same operation with the left paddle (-) to engage a lower gear.

134 Temporary failure This system prevents you from moving Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass In the event of a momentary problem, the the gear selector from position PARK (P) from REVERSE to another mode only transmission can be reset to regain all unless the brakes are applied. with the vehicle at a standstill and engine forward gears by performing the To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), idling. following steps: the ignition must be cycled to the AVV Do not change between PARK (P), mode (engine running or not) and the 1. Stop the vehicle. REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE (D) brake pedal must be pressed. modes with engine running at a speed 2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock above idling. if possible. If not, shift the transmission Disabling Before activating any transmission to NEUTRAL (N). Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing the operating mode, fully depress the brake 3. Push and hold the ignition until the vehicle, conveyor vehicle washing pedal. engine turns OFF. systems) inhibit the automatic activation Note: The unexpected movement of the of PARK (P) mode when stopping the vehicle can injure the occupants or 4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then engine, or proceed as described below: restart the engine. people nearby. Do not leave the vehicle 1. Vehicle at a standstill. with engine running: before getting out of 5. Shift into the desired gear range. If the passenger compartment always the problem is no longer detected, the 2. NEUTRAL (N) mode activated. engage the electric park brake, select the transmission will return to normal 3. Push the ignition button for at least PARK (P) mode, stop the engine. operation. three seconds. Note: Even if the transmission can be The automatic park brake engagement Warning! reset, we recommend that you visit your function when the engine is stopped can authorized dealer at your earliest also be deactivated on the Information possible convenience. Yourauthorized It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or and Entertainment system by selecting dealer has diagnostic equipment to NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than the following functions on the main menu: determine if the problem could reoccur. If idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing "Settings", "Driver Assistance" and the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate the transmission cannot be reset, service "Automatic Parking Brake". quickly forward or in reverse. Youcould lose is required at your authorized dealer. control of the vehicle and hit someone or Important Notes Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock something. Only shift into gear when the System Failure to comply with what is reported engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. below may damage the transmission: This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Shift into PARK (P) mode only with the Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in vehicle at a standstill. PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied.

135 Unintended movement of a vehicle could ALFA DNA PRO SELECTOR injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all Caution! Alfa DNA Pro System vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a This vehicle is equipped with a Alfa DNA vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift Only engage the gear with engine at idling Pro system selector (located on the the transmission into PARK, and turn the while fully depressing the brake pedal. If the center console). There are four modes of ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in transmission temperature exceeds the operation to be selected according to the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is normal operating limits, the transmission driving style and road conditions: locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against control unit may change the gear unwanted movement. engagement order and reduce the drive When leaving the vehicle, always make torque. If the transmission overheats, it sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, could operate incorrectly until it cools down. remove the key fob from the vehicle, and When using the vehicle with extremely lock the vehicle. low external temperatures, the transmission Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or operation may change depending on the with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing engine and transmission temperature, as children to be in a vehicle unattended is well as vehicle speed. Activation of the STARTING AND OPERATING dangerous for a number of reasons. A child torque converter clutch and of the eighth or others could be seriously or fatally injured. gear is inhibited until the transmission oil is Children should be warned not to touch the correctly warmed up. Complete operation of parking brake, brake pedal or the the transmission will be enabled as soon as 07076S0004EM transmission gear selector. the fluid temperature reaches the Alfa DNA Pro System Selector predefined value. Do not leave the key fob in or near the d = Dynamic (sports driving mode). vehicle (or in a location accessible to n = Natural (mode for driving in normal children), and do not leave the ignition in the conditions). AVVor ON mode. A child could operate a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. mode for maximum fuel savings). RACE = track race driving mode. = Adjusts the calibration of the active suspension (if equipped). Unlike the other modes, the RACE position does not latch; therefore, by rotating the selector to RACE, it will return to its initial position "d". The symbol of the active mode lights up in red on the selector. 136 On the instrument panel display, the Activation "Dynamic" Mode different modes are characterized by It is activated by rotating the selector to Activation different colors: the letter "n", the displays light up in blue. Natural - Blue It is activated by rotating the selector to Dynamic - Red the letter "d", the displays light up in red. Advanced Efficiency - Green RACE - Yellow

07116S0002EM Natural Mode 07116S0003EM The "Performance" screen graphically Dynamic Mode reproduces some parameters closely ESC and ASR systems: intervention 07076S0003EM linked to the efficiency of the driving thresholds that ensure more enjoyable, Mode Display style, with a view to limiting consumption. sportier driving while guaranteeing the Each driving mode is graphically different stability of the car. in frame color and contents of each individual "performance" screen. Engine and transmission: adoption of sports mapping. Driving Modes "Natural" Mode “Natural” Mode is characterized by reduced engine performance and ECO shifting strategy for the automatic transmission.

07116S0001EM Natural Mode Performance Display

137 "Advanced Efficiency" Mode Warning! Activation It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter "a", the displays light up in In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the accelerator pedal increases considerably. green. Consequently, driving is less fluid and comfortable.

07116S0008EM Advanced Efficiency Mode Performance Display “RACE” Mode Activation STARTING AND OPERATING 07116S0005EM It is activated by rotating the selector to Advanced Efficiency Mode position "RACE", the displays light up in ESC and ASR systems: intervention yellow.

07116S0006EM thresholds aimed at ensuring maximum Dynamic Mode Performance Display safety in low-grip driving conditions. It is The "Performance" screen displays advisable to select "Advanced Efficiency" parameters related to vehicle stability, mode in the presence of low-grip road the graphs illustrate the trend of the surfaces. longitudinal/lateral accelerations Engine and transmission: standard (G-meter information), considering response. gravity acceleration as a reference unit. The "Performance" screen graphically Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed displays some parameters closely on the right. related to the vehicle consumption. 07116S0004EM RACE Mode Engine and transmission: adoption of sports mapping.

138 Note: If the brake system overheats, this ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION is communicated by the Information and Warning! (AAS) — IF EQUIPPED Entertainment system. In this case, allow the system to cool for a few minutes by The vehicle's electronic suspension It is recommended to activate this mode driving the vehicle normally without management system is aimed at at the track. operating the brakes. optimizing the vehicle's performance. The system continuously monitors the In "RACE", the sensitivity of the Driving Mode Deactivation accelerator pedal increases considerably. damping of the suspension through the To deactivate any driving mode, simply actuator installed on each shock Consequently, driving is less fluid and move the selector to any other mode. comfortable. absorber. The calibration of the shock Note: absorbers can be adjusted to the conditions of the road surface and to the When the engine is next started, the The "Performance" screen displays dynamic conditions of the vehicle, parameters related to vehicle stability, "Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" and improving its comfort and road handling. the graphs illustrate the trend of the "Natural" mode selected previously is longitudinal/lateral accelerations The driver can choose, even while driving, retained. The system will reactivate in (only in "d" or "RACE" mode), between two (G-meter information), considering "Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" or gravity acceleration as a reference unit. types of suspension calibration: a more "Natural" mode, depending on which sporty ride or a more comfortable one. The screen displays the lateral and mode was selected before the engine longitudinal acceleration peaks. By pushing the button, the system will was stopped. work with the shock absorber calibration When the engine is next started, the which favors driving comfort. "RACE" mode selected previously is not retained. The system will reactivate in "Dynamic" mode. It is not possible to go directly from "Dynamic" mode to "Advanced Efficiency" mode and vice versa. You must always activate the “Natural” mode first and then select the other

05036S0014EM mode. RACE Mode Performance Display 04306S0001EM Alfa Active Suspension Button If the system fails, the following symbol will appear in the instrument cluster display . 139 STOP/START SYSTEM Engine stopping is signaled by the symbol lighting up on the instrument Stop/Start System cluster display. The Stop/Start system automatically Restarting the Engine shuts off the engine during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. To restart the engine, release the brake Releasing the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. pedal will automatically restart the With brake pressed, if the gear selector is engine. in automatic mode - DRIVE (D) - the The function was developed to increase engine can be restarted by moving the vehicle efficiency by reducing fuel gear selector to REVERSE (R) or NEUTRAL (N) or "AutoStick". 07126S0051EM consumption, gas emissions, and sound Stop/Start Button pollution. With brake pressed, if the gear selector is in "AutoStick" mode, the engine can be System Activation Operating Mode restarted by moving the gear selector to The activation of the system is indicated Stopping the Engine "+" or "–", or REVERSE (R) or NEUTRAL (N). by the symbol lighting up on the STARTING AND OPERATING With vehicle at a standstill and brake When the engine has been stopped display. In this condition, the light on the pedal pressed, the engine switches off if automatically, keeping the brake pedal button is off. the gear selector is in a position other pressed, the brake can be released System Deactivation than REVERSE (R). keeping the engine off by quickly shifting the gear selector to PARK (P). A message will appear on the display The system does not operate when the when the system is deactivated. In this gear selector is in REVERSE (R), in order To restart the engine, just move the gear condition, the light on the button is on. to making parking maneuvers easier. selector out of a position other than PARK (P). Note: Each time the engine is started, In the event of stops uphill, engine the system is activated regardless of switching off is disabled to make the "Hill System Manual Activation/ where was when it was previously Start Assist" function available (works Deactivation switched off. only with running engine). To manually activate/deactivate the NOTE: The engine can only be system, push the button located in the automatically stopped after having run at control panel on the left of the steering about 6 mph (10 km/h). After an wheel. automatic restart, the vehicle only needs to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) to stop the engine.

140 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not With the automatic climate control Autostop active, an adjustment in cabin heating or For higher comfort and increased safety, cooling is made or with MAX-DEF and to reduce emissions, there are function active. certain conditions where the engine will Safety Functions not autostop despite the system being active, such as: When the engine is stopped through the Engine still cold. Stop/Start system, if the driver releases Especially cold outside temperature. their seat belt, opens the driver's or Battery not sufficiently charged. passenger's door, or opens the hood from inside the vehicle, the engine can be Driver's door not shut. 07126S0002EM restarted only by using the ignition. Driver's seat belt not fastened. Battery Power Supply Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for parking This condition is indicated to the driver 1 — Socket both through a buzzer and a message on maneuvers). 2 — Sensor the instrument cluster display. With the automatic climate control 3 — Connector active, an adequate cabin heating or Irregular Operation cooling comfort has not been reached or In the event of malfunction, the Note: After setting the ignition to STOP with MAX-DEF function active. Stop/Start system is deactivated. and having closed the driver side door, During the first period of use, to For failure indications, see the "Warning wait at least one minute before initialize the system. Lights and Messages" paragraph, disconnecting the electrical supply from Steering angle beyond threshold. "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel" the battery. When reconnecting the chapter. electrical supply to the battery, make Engine Restarting Conditions sure that the ignition is in the STOP mode Vehicle Inactivity and the driver side door is closed. Due to comfort, emission control and safety reasons, the engine can restart In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the automatically without any action by the battery is replaced), special attention driver, under special conditions, such as: must be paid to the disconnection of the Battery not sufficiently charged. battery power supply. Reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. Proceed as follows: if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly). Remove connector from socket to Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on disconnect sensor (battery status roads with a grade). monitoring) installed on the negative pole Engine stopping by the Stop/Start of the battery. This sensor should never system for more than approx. three be disconnected from the pole except if minutes. the battery is replaced. 141 SPEED LIMITER Programmed Speed Icon Flashing Description The programmed speed will flash in the following scenarios: This feature allows the speed of the When the accelerator pedal has been vehicle to be limited to speeds, which can fully pressed and the vehicle has be set by the driver. exceeded the programmed speed. The maximum speed can be set with the Activating the system after setting a vehicle stationary or in motion. The minimum speed that can be set is 18 mph limit below the effective speed of the (30mk/h). vehicle. In the event of overtake acceleration. When this feature is active, the vehicle 07136S0001EM speed depends on the pressing of the Speed Limiter Display Deactivating The Device accelerator pedal until the programmed Speed Limit Programming speed limit is reached (see "Speed Limit The feature can be activated/ Programming" paragraph). The speed limit can be programmed deactivated through the Information through the Information and and Entertainment System.

STARTING AND OPERATING Activating The Device Entertainment System. Deactivating The Device The feature can be activated/ To access the function on the main menu, To access this feature on the main menu, deactivated through the Information select the following items in sequence: select the following items in sequence: and Entertainment System. "Settings", "Safety" and "Speed Limiter "Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and Activating The Device Set Speed". “OFF”. By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed To access this feature on the main menu, Automatic Deactivation Of The Device increases by 3 mph (5 km/h), from a select the following items in sequence: The device deactivates automatically in "Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and minimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h). the event of fault in the system. In this “on”. case, contact an authorized dealer. The activation of this feature is signaled Exceeding The Programmed Speed by the displaying of the green symbol Temporary Signal Loss By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, along with the last speed set. The Speed When the devices loses the signal, the the programmed speed can be exceeded Limiter feature can remain active white symbol without the speed even with the device active (e.g. in the concurrently with the Speed Control indication illuminates on the display. event of overtaking). system. If a speed limit below the one System Failure indicated in the Speed Control is The device is disabled until the speed selected, the Speed Control speed will be drops below the set limit, after which it If there is a system failure, the amber lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. This reactivates automatically. symbol illuminates on the display. function remains available in RACE mode. 142 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL The activation of the system is signaled by the white warning light switching (CRUISE CONTROL) Warning! on the instrument cluster. Electronic Speed Control Description The Electronic Speed Control function This is an electronically controlled driving Speed Control can be dangerous where the can remain active at the same time as the assistance feature that allows the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Speed Limiter System. If a speed limit desired vehicle speed to be maintained, Yourvehicle could go too fast for the below the one indicated in the set speed without having to press the accelerator conditions, and you could lose control and control, the speed control speed will be pedal. This feature can be used at a speed have an accident. Do not use Speed Control lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, This function remains available in RACE stretches of dry, straight roads with few icy, snow-covered or slippery. mode. variations (highways). Note: The system cannot be engaged in The speed control buttons are located on Activating FIRST or REVERSE gear. It is advisable to the left side of the steering wheel. To activate the Electronic Speed Control engage it in THIRD gear or higher if using Note: System, push the on/off button location the Autostick feature. on the left side of the steering wheel. To ensure correct operation, the speed control is designed to deactivate Warning! if more than one function is operated simultaneously. In this case, the system can be reactivated by pushing the on/off Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. Youcould button and setting the desired accidentally set the system or cause it to go speed. faster than you want. Youcould lose control It is not recommended to use this and have an accident. Always leave the feature in city traffic. system OFF when you are not using it. While driving downhill, the system could brake the vehicle to keep the set speed the same. 07146S0001EM Electronic Speed Control On/Off Switch

143 Setting The Desired Speed Increasing/Decreasing Speed On steep grades, the loss or gain in speed may be considerable and is advisable to To set a desired speed, proceed as Increasing Speed deactivate the Electronic Speed Control. follows: Once the Electronic Speed Control has Note: The feature keeps the speed set been activated, the speed can be 1. Turn the Electronic Speed Control on. even uphill and downhill. A slight variation increased by pushing the SET switch in the speed on slight rises is completely 2. When the vehicle has reached the upward. normal. desired speed, push the SET switch up or By keeping the button pushed, the set down and release to activate. When the speed will increase until the button is Recalling The Speed accelerator is released, the vehicle will released. The new speed will then be set. Note: Before returning to the previously keep the selected speed automatically. At every movement of the SET switch, set speed, you must accelerate to a the set speed can be adjusted. speed close to that speed, then push the RES button and release it. Decreasing Speed When the feature is active, to reduce the While in DRIVE (D), push and release the speed, push the SET switch downward. RES button to recall the previously set speed.

STARTING AND OPERATING By keeping the button pushed, the set speed will decrease until the button is released. The new speed will then be set. At every movement of the SET switch, the set speed can be adjusted.

07146S0002EM Note: Moving the SET switch allows to Set Switch Location adjust the speed according to the selected unit of measurement set on the If needed (when overtaking for instance), Information and Entertainment System you can accelerate beyond the set speed (see dedicated supplement). by pressing the accelerator. When you

release the pedal, the vehicle goes back Accelerating When Overtaking 07146S0003EM to the previously set speed. Press the accelerator as you would Resume Button Location When traveling downhill with the system normally. When the pedal is released, the In Autostick (sequential) mode, before active, the vehicle speed may slightly vehicle will return to the set speed. recalling the previously set speed, you exceed the set one. Use Of The Feature On Hilly Routes should accelerate until you are close to Note: Before pushing the SET switch, the The feature can automatically downshift that speed. Then, push and release the vehicle must be traveling at a constant to keep the set speed when driving on RES button. speed on a flat surface. hilly routes.

144 Deactivating ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL Lightly pressing the brake pedal (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED deactivates the speed control without System Description deleting the set speed. The speed control may also be deactivated The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a by applying the electric park brake or when driver assist system that combines the the braking system is operated speed control functions for controlling (e.g. operation of the ESC system). the distance from the vehicle ahead. The set speed is deleted in the following The system allows to set and hold the cases: vehicle at the desired speed without needing to press the accelerator. It also 06016S0004EM Pushing the on/off button twice. allows to set and hold a distance from the Windshield Camera Location The ignition is cycled to the STOP vehicle ahead (these settings are set by the driver). This system enhances driving comfort position while on the highway or out of town with The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) uses a light traffic. If there is a malfunction with the radar sensor located behind the front Electronic Speed Control. bumper and a camera located in the If the sensor does not detect a vehicle center/upper part of the windshield, to ahead, the system will maintain a fixed detect the presence of a vehicle close set speed. ahead. If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the device automatically intervenes by braking (or accelerating) slightly in order not to exceed the original set speed, so that the vehicle keeps the preset distance, seeking to adapt to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Note: Adaptive Cruise Control performance is not guaranteed under the following circumstances, and it is recommended to turn the system off when: 06016S0003EM Front Bumper Radar Location Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow Driving in heavy traffic or construction zones

145 Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads, Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop roads with steep climbs and descents, or while following a target vehicle and hold the roads with numerous turns and bends vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not Entering a turn lane start moving within 3 minutes the parking Towing a trailer brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be canceled. When circumstances do not allow Youshould switch off the ACC system: safe driving at a constant speed When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway Warning! construction zones). 07146S0010EM On/Off Button When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are When the system is enabled and ready to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have operate, the display shows the white icon convenience system. It is not a substitute for steep uphill or downhill slopes. active driving involvement. It is always the above dashes in place of the speed.

STARTING AND OPERATING driver’s responsibility to be attentive of When circumstances do not allow safe road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle driving at a constant speed. speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road Activation/Deactivation conditions. Yourcomplete attention is The system has four operating states: always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow Enabled (speed not set) these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. Activated (speed set) The ACC system: Paused Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming Deactivated 07146S0016EM vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a Enabled Icons Enabling/Activating stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled Setting a speed activates the system. To enable the system, push and release vehicle). The display shows the icon in green with the button located on the left side on Cannot take street, traffic, and weather the set speed. the steering wheel. conditions into account, and may be limited Note: The system cannot be enabled upon adverse sight distance conditions. when RACE mode is active. Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings. 146 When the engine rpm is above a maximum threshold. Warning! When the vehicle speed is not within the operational speed range. Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You When the ESC (or ABS or other could accidentally set the system or cause it stability control systems) are operating to go faster than you want. Youcould lose or have just operated. control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it. When the ESC system is off. When the Forward Collision Warning 07146S0017EM system (if equipped) is braking Pausing/Deactivating SET Switch With the feature enabled (speed not set), automatically. While the accelerator pedal is pressed, push the button to disable. In the event of system failure. the system will not be able to control the With the feature active (speed set), push distance between the vehicle and the one When the engine is OFF. the button to pause. The display will ahead. In this case, the speed will be show the icon in white with the speed in In case of obstruction of the radar determined only by the position of the brackets. To deactivate the feature, push sensor (in this case the bumper area accelerator pedal. the button a second time. where it is located must be cleaned). The system will return to normal If the system is set, the conditions Setting The Desired Speed operation as soon as the accelerator described above also cause a pedal is released. The speed can be set from a minimum of cancellation or deactivation of the 20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of The system cannot be set: system. These situations may vary 110 mph (180 km/h). When pressing the brake pedal. according to the conditions. When the vehicle reaches the desired Note: The system will not be deactivated When the brakes are overheated. speed, push the SET switch upward or when speeds higher than those set are downward and release it to activate the When the electric park brake has been reached by pressing the accelerator system. When the accelerator is released, operated. pedal above 110 mph (180 km/h). In the vehicle will maintain the set speed these situations, the system may not When either PARK (P), REVERSE (R) or automatically. work correctly and it is recommended to NEUTRAL (N) is engaged. deactivate it.

147 To VaryThe Speed Setting case, use the SET switch to set the right direction indicator and returns to speed to the vehicle’s current speed the original lane. Increasing Speed Once the system has been activated, you When you push the SET button to Resuming The Speed reduce the speed, the braking system can increase the speed by lifting the SET Once the system has been canceled but intervenes automatically if the engine switch. Each time it is operated, the not deactivated, to resume a previously brake does not slow the vehicle down speed increases by 1 mph. set speed, simply push the RES button sufficiently to reach the set speed. The By holding the button up, the set speed and remove your foot from the device holds the set speed uphill and will increase in increments of 5 mph until accelerator to recall it. downhill; however a slight variation is the button is released. Then, the new The system will be set to the last stored speed will be set. entirely normal, particularly on slight inclines speed. Decreasing Speed The transmission could change to a Once the system has been activated, you lower gear when driving downhill, or can decrease the speed by lowering the when accelerating. This is normal and SET switch. Each time it is operated, the necessary to maintain the set speed speed decreases by 1 mph. STARTING AND OPERATING By holding the button down, the set The system will disable while driving speed will decrease in increments of if the brakes overheat 5 mph until the button is released. Then, Accelerating When Overtaking the new speed will be set. When driving with ACC activated and Note: following a vehicle, the system will 07146S0018EM Moving the SET switch allows you to provide an additional acceleration up to RES (Resume) Button adjust the speed according to the the ACC set speed to assist in passing the Before returning to the previously set selected unit of measurement ("US" or vehicle. This additional acceleration is speed, bring the speed close to that "metric") set on the Information and triggered when the driver utilizes the left value, then push the RES button and Entertainment System (see dedicated turn signal and will only be active when release it. supplement) passing on the left hand side. The system detects the direction of When the unit of measurement is set traffic automatically when the vehicle to metric, holding the SET switch the passes from left-hand traffic to speed will change in 10 km/h increments right-hand traffic. In this case, the By keeping the accelerator pedal overtaking assist function is only active depressed, the vehicle can continue to when the reference vehicle is overtaken accelerate beyond the set speed. In this on the right. The additional acceleration is deactivated when the driver uses the 148 one-bar setting) to two seconds (for the system automatically adjusts the maximum distance four-bar setting). vehicle’s speed to keep the set distance, Warning! The set distance is shown on the display independently of the set speed. by a dedicated icon. The vehicle holds the set distance until: The Resume function should only be used if The setting is four (maximum) the first The vehicle ahead accelerates to a traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming time the system is used. After the speed higher than the set speed. a set speed that is too high or too low for distance has been modified by the driver, The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate the new distance will be stored also after the detection field of the Adaptive Cruise too sharply for safe operation. Failure to the system is deactivated and Control system sensor. follow these warnings can result in a collision reactivated. The distance setting is changed. and death or serious personal injury. To Decrease The Distance The Adaptive Cruise Control system is Push and release the distance button to deactivated/paused. Setting The Distance Between Vehicles decrease the distance setting. The The distance between your vehicle and distance setting decreases by one bar Warning! the vehicle ahead may be set to one bar (shorter) every time the button is pushed. (short), two bars (medium), three bars (long), or four bars (maximum). The maximum breaking applied by the system is limited. The driver may apply the brakes in all cases if needed. If the system predicts that the braking level is insufficient to hold the set distance, either “BRAKE!” or a dedicated message is displayed to warn the driver of approaching the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is also emitted. In this case, it is advised to brake immediately as necessary to hold a safe

07146S0015EM distance from the vehicle ahead. Distance Button The driver is responsible for ensuring that there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or 07146S0019EM The set speed is held if there are no Distance Icons objectives along the direction of the vehicle. vehicles ahead. Once the shortest Failure to comply with these precautions The distances from the vehicle ahead are distance has been selected, the next push may cause serious accidents and injuries. proportional to speed. of the button will set the maximum distance. The driver is fully responsible for holding The interval of time with relation to the a safe distance from the vehicle ahead vehicle ahead remains constant and varies If a slower vehicle is detected in the same respecting the highway code in force in the from one second (for the short distance lane, the vehicle icon on the display respective country. illuminates from grey to white. The 149 “Stop And Go” Function Limited Operation Warning The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and out of the driving lane causing the vehicle The “Stop and Go” operating strategy If the dedicated message is shown on the to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. allows you to maintain a safe distance display, a condition limiting the Adaptive from the vehicle ahead until the vehicle Cruise Control operation may have Steering And Curves has completely stopped. It will also occurred. Driving on curves with the system set restart the vehicle automatically if the This could be due to an obstruction of the could limit speed and acceleration to vehicle ahead drives away within two vehicle’s sensor or camera. It could also guarantee vehicle stability, even if no seconds, otherwise it is necessary to be due to a fault in the system. If an vehicles are detected ahead. press the accelerator pedal or push the obstruction is detected, clean the area of When leaving the curve, the system RES button to restart. the windshield opposite the interior rear resets the previously set speed. view mirror, where the camera is located, Warning! as well as the area of the front bumper where the sensor is located. Then check When the ACC system is resumed, the driver that the message has disappeared. must ensure that there are no pedestrians, When the conditions limiting the system

STARTING AND OPERATING vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. functions end, normal operation will Failure to follow these warnings can result in resume. a collision and death or serious personal Should the fault persist, contact an injury. authorized dealer. Precautions While Driving Deactivation The system may not work correctly in 07146S0011EM The system is deactivated and the set Steering And Curves some driving conditions (see below). The speed is canceled if: driver must control the vehicle at all The button on the Active Cruise Note: times. Control is pushed (with the system In cases of narrow curves, the enabled or paused). Vehicle Not Aligned performance of the system could be The ignition is in STOP mode. The system may not detect a vehicle limited. In this case, it is advisable to RACE mode is activated. traveling in the same lane, in the same deactivate the system. direction, but is not aligned. It also may The system is canceled (the set speed The system only limits the speed not detect a vehicle which is cutting in and distance are stored): DURING a bend and not BEFORE it. from a side lane. Sufficient distance from When the system is paused (Refer to the vehicles ahead may not be the “Activation / Deactivation” section). guaranteed in these cases. When the conditions shown in the “Setting The Desired Speed” section occur. 150 Using The System On Slopes When driving on roads with a variable incline, the system may not detect the presence of a vehicle in the lane. System performance could be limited according to speed, load, traffic conditions and steep slopes. Lane Change The system may not detect the presence of a vehicle until it is fully in your lane. 07146S0013EM 07146S0014EM Small Vehicles Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or Crosswise Direction Sufficient distance from the vehicles ahead may not be guaranteed in these General Information cases. This vehicle has systems that operate Stationary Objects And Vehicles on radio frequency that comply with The system cannot detect the presence Part 15 of the Federal Communications of stationary vehicles or objects. For Commission (FCC) rules and example, the system will not operate if with Industry Canada Standards the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a RSS- GEN/210/220/310. 07146S0012EM vehicle ahead of that one is stationary in Operation is subject to the following two Lane Change that lane. Pay the utmost attention at all conditions: In this case, sufficient distance from the times and be always ready to apply the brakes if needed. 1. The device may not cause harmful vehicle which is changing lanes may not interference. be guaranteed. It is advisable to pay the Objects And Vehicles Moving In utmost attention at all times and be Opposite Or Crosswise Direction 2. The device must accept any interference received, including always ready to apply the brakes if The system cannot detect the presence interference that may cause undesired needed. of objects or vehicles traveling in operation of the device. Small Vehicles opposite or crosswise directions and consequently will not activate. Changes or modifications to any of these Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles and systems by other than an authorized motorcycles) traveling near the outer service facility could void authorization edges of the lane or which enter the lane to use this equipment. from curb side are not detected until they are fully in the lane. 151 PARK SENSORS SYSTEM The acoustic signal increases in frequency as the distance between the Vehicles With Rear Sensors Only vehicle and the obstacle decreases. The parking sensors, located in the rear The acoustic signal becomes bumper, detect obstacles while the continuous when the distance between vehicle is in REVERSE. When an obstacle the vehicle and the obstacle is less than is detected, an acoustic alert will sound 11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the and visual indications will be displayed on distance increases. the instrument cluster. The acoustic signal is constant if the distance between the vehicle and the 07176S0052EM obstacle is unchanged. Park Sensors System On/Off Switch Note: If several obstacles are detected The indicator light within the Park by the sensors, only the nearest one is Sensors System switch will also be on in considered. case of system failure. If the switch is Indication On Display STARTING AND OPERATING pushed with a system failure, the indicator light will flash for The driver can select the type of warning approximately five seconds. The light will they would like to be displayed through then stay on constantly. the Information and Entertainment 07176S0001EM Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON, System. To access the function on the Rear Sensor Location the Park Sensors System keeps the last main menu, select in the following order: Engagement/Disengagement state when the engine was stopped 1. “Settings.” To turn the system off, push the Park (activated or deactivated) in its memory. 2. “Driver Assistance.” Sensors System button located to the System Activation/Deactivation left of the headlight switch. The indicator The system, when engaged, is 3. “ParkSense.” light within the button will illuminate automatically activated by engaging the 4. “Mode.” when the system is turned off. Pushing REVERSE gear. It is deactivated by the button a second time will turn the engaging another gear. 5. “Sound-Display.” system back on, and the indicator light will turn off. Acoustic Signal Visual Indications When REVERSE is engaged and there is The system indicates the presence of an an obstacle behind the vehicle, an obstacle by displaying a single red arc in acoustic signal with variable frequency the detected area, in relation to the will sound. distance of the object and the position of the vehicle. 152 If the obstacle is detected in the rear Cleaning The Front Sensors: If the sensors. For example, due to a change in central area, a single red arc will be display shows a message requiring the the ride setting (caused by wear to the displayed as the obstacle approaches, sensors to be cleaned, make sure that the shock absorbers or suspension), by first constant, then flashing, in addition outer surface and the underside of the changing tires, overloading the vehicle or to an acoustic signal. rear bumper is free of debris (e.g. snow, operations that require the vehicle to be If the obstacle is detected in the rear left mud, ice, etc.). Once these areas are clear, lowered. cycle the ignition to the STOP position. and/or right area, a single red flashing arc Be sure not to place bumper stickers Then, return it to ON position. If the will be shown in the corresponding area or other adhesives over the sensors as message is still displayed, contact an on the display and the system will emit an this will affect system performance. acoustic signal, either at frequent authorized dealer. intervals or constantly. Audio System Not Available: If the In general, the vehicle is closer to the display shows a message that the audio Warning! obstacle when a single red flashing arc is system is not available, it means that the shown on the display and the acoustic acoustic signal will be emitted by the signal becomes continuous. Drivers must be careful when backing up instrument panel, and not through the even when using the Parking Sensor system. If several obstacles are detected vehicles speakers. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, simultaneously in the rear area, the Note: Some conditions may influence and be sure to check for pedestrians, display will show all of them, regardless the performance of the Park Sensors animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or of the area in which they were detected. System: blind spots before backing up. Youare It is not possible to exit from the display responsible for the safety of your Reduced sensor sensitivity could be surroundings and must continue to pay screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE. due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or attention while backing up. Failure to do so Fault Indication thick paint on the surface of the sensor. can result in serious injury or death. Parking sensor faults, if any, will be The sensors may detect a false indicated when REVERSE is engaged by a obstacle (echo interference) due to Caution! message on the instrument cluster mechanical interference, for example display. Refer to "Warning Lights And when washing the vehicle or in extreme Messages" in "Getting To Know Your weather. The Parking Sensor system is only a Instrument Panel" for further parking aid and it is unable to recognize information. The signals sent by the sensors can every obstacle, including small obstacles. be altered by the presence of ultrasonic Parking curbs might be temporarily detected Messages On The Display systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems or not detected at all. Obstacles located In case of system failure, a dedicated of or pneumatic drills) near the above or below the sensors will not be message appears on the instrument vehicle. detected when they are in close proximity cluster for about five seconds. System performance can be influenced by the position of the 153 The vehicle must be driven slowly when System Activation/Deactivation using the Parking Sensor system in order to When the REVERSE gear is engaged and be able to stop in time when an obstacle is the system is on, the front and rear detected. It is recommended that the driver sensors are activated. If the vehicle looks over his/her shoulder when using the moves from REVERSE to a forward gear, Parking Sensor system. the rear sensors are deactivated, while the front sensors remain active until the Vehicles With Front And Rear Sensors speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded. Note: In certain operating conditions, the The parking sensors, located in the front system could start detecting an obstacle and rear bumpers, detect the presence of only after the vehicle has moved slightly any obstacles and warn the driver 07176S0001EM (a few inches). through an acoustic signal and visual Rear Sensor Location indications will be displayed on the Engagement/Disengagement Acoustic Signal instrument cluster. To turn the system off, push the Park In the presence of an obstacle at the Sensors System switch located to the front or the rear of the vehicle, an

STARTING AND OPERATING left of the headlight switch. The indicator acoustic signal with variable frequency light within the switch will illuminate will sound: when the system is turned off. Pushing The acoustic signal increases in the switch a second time will turn the frequency as the distance between the system back on, and the indicator light vehicle and the obstacle decreases. will turn off. The indicator light within the Park The acoustic signal becomes Sensors System switch will also be on in continuous when the distance between case of system failure. If the switch is the vehicle and the obstacle is less than 11 in (30 cm), and stops if the distance 07176S0003EM pushed with a system failure, the Front Sensor Location indicator light will flash for increases. approximately five seconds. The light will The acoustic signal is constant if the then stay on constantly. distance between the vehicle and the Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON obstacle is unchanged. the Park Sensors system keeps the last Note: If the sensors detect several front state when the engine was stopped and rear obstacles, the closest obstacle (activated or deactivated) in its memory. is considered. An intermittent signal will sound if the obstacles are at the same distance (front and rear).

154 When the system emits an acoustic If several obstacles are detected Audio system not available: If the signal, the volume of the Information and simultaneously in the front and rear area, display shows a message that the audio Entertainment System, if activated, is the display will show all of them, system is not available, it means that the automatically lowered. regardless of the area in which they were acoustic signal will be emitted by the detected. instrument panel, and not through the Indication On Display In general, the vehicle is closer to the vehicles speakers. The driver can select the type of warning obstacle when a single or several flashing Note: Some conditions may influence they would like to be displayed through arcs are shown on the display and the the performance of the Park Sensors the Information and Entertainment acoustic signal becomes continuous. System: System. To access the function on the main menu, select in the following order: It is not possible to exit from the display Reduced sensor sensitivity could be screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE. due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or 1. “Settings.” Fault Indication thick paint on the surface of the sensor. 2. “Driver Assistance.” Parking sensor faults, if any, will be The sensors may detect a false 3. “ParkSense.” indicated by a message on the display on obstacle (echo interference) due to the instrument cluster. Refer to "Warning mechanical interference, for example 4. “Mode.” Lights And Messages" in "Getting To when washing the vehicle or in extreme Know YourInstrument Panel" for further weather. 5. “Sound-Display.” information. Visual Indications The signals sent by the sensors can Messages On The Display The system indicates the presence of an be altered by the presence of ultrasonic obstacle by displaying a single red arc in In case of system failure, a dedicated systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems the detected areas, in relation to the message appears on the instrument of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the distance of the object and the position of cluster for about five seconds. vehicle. the vehicle. Cleaning the front or rear sensors: System performance can be If the obstacle is detected in the front or If the display shows a message requiring influenced by the position of the rear central area, a single red arc will be the sensors to be cleaned, make sure that sensors. For example, due to a change in displayed as the obstacle approaches, the outer surface and the underside of the ride setting (caused by wear to the first constant, then flashing, in addition the front and rear bumpers are free of shock absorbers or suspension), by to an acoustic signal. debris (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once changing tires, overloading the vehicle or If the obstacle is detected in the front or these areas are clear, place the ignition in operations that require the vehicle to be rear left and/or right area, a single red STOP mode. Then, return it to ON mode. lowered. flashing arc will be shown in the If the message is still displayed, contact Be sure not to place bumper stickers corresponding area on the display and an authorized dealer. or other adhesives over the sensors as the system will emit an acoustic signal, this will affect system performance. either at frequent intervals or constantly. 155 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield, Warning! (LDW) SYSTEM by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are driving not aligned with yours, vehicle driving Description in a transverse or opposite way on the same Drivers must be careful when backing up The Lane Departure Warning system uses lane, bend with a small radius of curvature), even when using the Parking Sensor system. a forward looking camera located on the by road surface conditions and by driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving). Make sure Always check carefully behind your vehicle, windshield to detect lane markings and and be sure to check for pedestrians, the windshield is always clean. Use specific measure vehicle position within the lane detergents and clean cloths to avoid animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or boundaries. blind spots before backing up. Youare scratching the windshield. The camera responsible for the safety of your When one or both lane limits are operation may also be limited or absent in surroundings and must continue to pay detected and the vehicle passes over one some driving, traffic and road surface attention while backing up. Failure to do so without an activated turn signal, the conditions. can result in serious injury or death. system emits a visual as well as an If the windshield must be replaced due to acoustic signal. scratches, chipping or breakage, contact If the vehicle continues to go beyond the exclusively an authorized dealer. Do not replace the windshield on your own. It is Caution! line of the lane without any intervention STARTING AND OPERATING advisable to replace the windshield if it is from the driver, the surpassed line will damaged in the area of the camera. light up on the display (left or right) to The Parking Sensor system is only a urge the driver to bring the vehicle back parking aid and it is unable to recognize into the limits of the lane. System Activation/Deactivation every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected The system is activated/deactivated by or not detected at all. Obstacles located pushing the button located on the end of above or below the sensors will not be Caution! the multifunction lever. detected when they are in close proximity

The vehicle must be driven slowly when Do not tamper with nor operate on the using the Parking Sensor system in order to camera. Do not close the openings in the be able to stop in time when an obstacle is aesthetic cover located under the interior detected. It is recommended that the driver rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of looks over his/her shoulder when using the the camera, contact an authorized dealer. Parking Sensor system. The camera may have limited or absent operation due to weather conditions such as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, formation of ice layers on the windshield.

07226S0001EM Camera operation may also be Lane Departure Warning System compromised by the presence of dust, Activation/Deactivation Button 156 Note: When the engine is started, the Exiting a lane with detection of a single system maintains the operating mode limit that was selected when it was turned When the system is active and only, for OFF. example, the left lane limit has been Activation Conditions detected, the detected lane illuminates in white on the display; the system is ready Once turned on, the system becomes to provide visual warnings on the display active only if the following conditions are in the event of unintentional exiting of met: the lane (turn signal not activated) to the The vehicle speed is above 37 mph left. (60 km/h). 07226S0002EM The lane limit lines are visible at least Vehicle Changing Lanes on one side. When the system is active and the lane There are suitable visibility conditions. limits have not been detected, the display shows a grey vehicle icon with two grey The road is straight or with wide radius lines. bends. A suitable distance is kept from the vehicle in front.

The turn signal is not active. 07226S0003EM Symbols And Messages On The Display Left Lane Limit Detected The Lane Departure Warning system When the system detects that the vehicle advises the driver when the vehicle has approached the lane line and is about leaves the driving lane by showing to pass it, the left line on the display symbols and messages on the instrument illuminates in yellow. cluster display. 07226S0007EM Lane Limits Not Detected

157 When lane limits are detected, the To access the function, from the main system is ready to provide indications in menu select the following in order: case the driver unintentionally leaves the lane (turn signal not activated). 1. “Settings.” As the Lane Departure Warning system 2. “Safety.” detects the lane limits while the vehicle is in motion, it will adjust the display 3. “Lane Departure Warning.” accordingly (from white to yellow and 4. “Sensitivity.” vice versa, and increase their thickness). Limited Operation Warning If a message appears on the display, a 07226S0004EM Left Lane Limit Approached condition limiting the Lane Departure Warning system operation may have The system operates in the same way, occurred. This could be an obstruction of but mirrored, in the event of exiting the the camera view, or a fault in the system. right lane when only the right lane limit If an obstruction is detected, clean the

STARTING AND OPERATING has been detected. area of the windshield by the interior rear Exiting a lane with detection of both view mirror. limits Although the vehicle can still be driven in normal conditions, the system may not When the system is active, both lane lines 07226S0006EM on the display illuminate in white to Right Lane Limit Approached function properly. indicate the successful detection of both When the conditions limiting the system limits. If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted by are corrected, it will go back to normal an audible signal as well as the visual operation. Should a fault persist, contact indication in the instrument cluster. The an authorized dealer. signal is emitted through the speakers on the side of the lane limit which is being System Failure Warning crossed (eg. if the vehicle is exceeding If the system turns off and appears on the left line of the lane, the audible signal the display, it means that there is a will come from the speakers on the left of system fault. the vehicle). In this case, it is still possible to drive the Changing The System Settings vehicle, but you are advised to contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system's sensitivity can be set through the Information and 07226S0005EM Both Lane Limits Detected Entertainment System. Sensitivity “High” or “Low” can be selected. 158 REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / Selecting “Camera Guidelines” will DYNAMIC GRIDLINES activate the display of the dynamic guidelines that indicate the route of the Description vehicle. The Rear Back-Up Camera is located just under the vehicle’s trunk lid, above the rear license plate. Warning!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Back Up Camera. 07186S0002EM Always check carefully behind your vehicle, Rear Back-Up Camera Display and be sure to check for pedestrians, Rear Back-Up Camera Features animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. Youare To activate the Rear Back-Up Camera responsible for the safety of your features, select “Settings” from the Main surroundings and must continue to pay Menu of the Information and attention while backing up. Failure to do so Entertainment System. Under “Driver can result in serious injury or death. 07186S0001EM Assistance”, Rear Back-Up Camera Rear Back-Up Camera Location features can be selected: When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the View Caution! Information and Entertainment System display will show the area behind the Camera Delay To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up vehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-up Camera Guidelines Camera, along with a warning message. Camera should only be used as a parking aid. Selecting “View” will activate the camera The Rear Back Up Camera is unable to view view on the display. every obstacle or object in your drive path. Selecting “Camera Delay” will allow the To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must camera view to remain on the display be driven slowly when using the Rear Back shortly after the vehicle is no longer in Up Camera to be able to stop in time when an REVERSE, followed by the previously obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the active screen. driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Back Up Camera.

159 Symbols And Messages On The Display Messages On The Display REFUELING THE VEHICLE Indications On The Display If the trunk lid is lifted, the camera will Refueling The Vehicle not detect any obstacle behind the Through the Information and vehicle. The display will show a dedicated Before refueling, make sure that the fuel Entertainment System settings, by warning message. type is correct. activating the "Camera Guidelines" feature, guidelines can be seen on the Make sure the trunk lid is closed by Also, stop the engine before refueling. rear camera display. If activated, the pushing next to the lock until it clicks. Note: An inefficient catalytic converter guidelines are positioned on the image to Important Notes leads to harmful exhaust emissions, thus highlight the width of the vehicle and the contributing to air pollution. expected reverse path based on the Ice, snow or mud on the surface of the steering wheel position. camera may reduce its sensitivity. It is important to keep the camera surface Caution! A superimposed central line indicates the clean, and free from debris. center of the vehicle to assist in rear parking maneuvers. The various colored When parking, be aware of obstacles Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank, even areas indicate the distance from the rear that may be above or under the camera in small amounts in an emergency, as this would damage the catalytic converter STARTING AND OPERATING of the vehicle. range. The table below shows the approximate beyond repair. distances for each area: Refueling Capacity Distance from the To ensure that you fill the tank Area rear of the vehicle completely, top off twice after the first click of the fuel nozzle. 0–11.8 inches Red (0–30 cm) Further top-off could cause faults in the fuel feeding system. 11.8 inches to 3.3 feet Yellow (30 cm–1 m) Refueling Procedure The fuel filler door is unlocked when the 3.3 feet or more Green (1mormore) central door locking system is unlocked. It is automatically locked when the central locking system is applied.

160 Opening The Fuel Filler Door 5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten 2. Open the cap, and pull the cord inside To refuel proceed as follows: the gas cap about ¼ turn until you hear to unlock the fuel filler door. one click. This is an indication that cap is 1. Open fuel filler door by pressing on properly tightened. 3. Open the fuel filler door by pressing on it (see the previous instructions). the point shown by the arrow. The label indicates the fuel type (UNLEADED FUEL = gasoline). Warning!

Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled. Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on. 07206S0001EM Fuel Door A fire may result if gasoline is pumped 07206S0002EM into a portable container that is inside of a 2. Remove the fuel filler cap. Fuel Door Label vehicle. Youcould be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the Emergency Fuel Door Opening filler pipe. In the event of an emergency the fuel filler door can be opened by operating Note: If the filler compartment is 4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts from inside the trunk. washed with a pressure washer, keep it at off, before removing the nozzle, wait for a distance of at least 8 inches (20 cm). at least 10 seconds in order for the fuel Proceed as follows: to flow inside the tank. 1. Open the trunk and locate the emergency fuel filler release cap on the inside lining.

161 VEHICLE LOADING Payload Inflation Pressure Certification Label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the This is the cold tire inflation pressure for As required by National Highway Traffic allowable load weight a truck can carry, your vehicle for all loading conditions up Safety Administration regulations, your including the weight of the driver, all to full GAWR. passengers, options and cargo. vehicle has a certification label affixed to Curb Weight the driver's side door or pillar. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) This label contains the month and year of The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight The GAWR is the maximum permissible the total weight of the vehicle with all Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating load on the front and rear axles. The load fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle must be distributed in the cargo area so capacity conditions, and with no Identification Number (VIN). A that the GAWR of each axle is not occupants or cargo loaded into the Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is exceeded. vehicle. The front and rear curb weight included on this label and indicates the Each axle GAWR is determined by the values are determined by weighing your Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The components in the system with the vehicle on a commercial scale before any bar code that appears on the bottom of lowest load carrying capacity (axle, occupants or cargo are added. STARTING AND OPERATING the label is your VIN. springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or Loading suspension components sometimes Gross Vehicle Weight Rating specified by purchasers for increased The actual total weight and the weight of (GVWR) durability does not necessarily increase the front and rear of your vehicle at the the vehicle's GVWR. ground can best be determined by The GVWR is the total permissible weighing it when it is loaded and ready weight of your vehicle including driver, Tire Size for operation. passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum The tire size on the Vehicle Certification The entire vehicle should first be weighed capacities of front and rear axle systems Label represents the actual tire size on on a commercial scale to insure that the (GAWR). Total load must be limited so your vehicle. Replacement tires must be GVWR has not been exceeded. The GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not equal to the load capacity of this tire size. weight on the front and rear of the exceeded. vehicle should then be determined Rim Size separately to be sure that the load is This is the rim size that is appropriate for properly distributed over the front and the tire size listed. rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. 162 Store the heavier items down low and be TRAILER TOWING SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely Trailer towing is not recommended for Saving Fuel before driving. this vehicle. Below are some suggestions which may Improper weight distributions can have help you save fuel and lower the amount an adverse effect on the way your vehicle of harmful emissions released into the steers and handles and the way the atmosphere. brakes operate. Vehicle Maintenance Checks and operations should be carried out in accordance with the Maintenance Caution! Plan. Refer to "Scheduled Servicing" in "Servicing And Maintenance" for further Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the information. GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. Tires If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. Check the tire pressures at least once This could cause you to lose control. Also every four weeks: if the pressure is too overloading can shorten the life of your low, consumption levels increase as vehicle. resistance to rolling is higher. Unnecessary Loads Do not travel with an overloaded trunk. The weight of the vehicle and its arrangement greatly affect fuel consumption and stability. Electric Devices Use electrical systems only for the amount of time needed. The rear window defroster, additional headlights, windshield wipers and heater blower fan require a considerable amount of energy; increasing the current uptake increases fuel consumption (by up to +25% when city driving).

163 Climate Control System Max. Speed Transporting Passengers Using the climate control system will Fuel consumption considerably increases increase consumption: use standard as speed increases. Maintain a constant ventilation when the temperature speed, avoiding unnecessary braking and Warning! outside permits. acceleration, which cost in terms of both fuel consumption and emissions. Devices for Aerodynamic Control It is extremely dangerous to leave Acceleration children in a parked vehicle when the The use of non-certified devices for temperature outside is very high. The heat aerodynamic control may adversely Accelerating violently severely affects inside the passenger compartment may affect air drag and consumption levels. consumption and emissions: acceleration have serious, or even fatal, consequences. should be gradual and should not exceed Driving Style the maximum torque. Never travel in the trunk of the vehicle. In the event of an accident, anyone inside the Starting Conditions Of Use trunk would be at greater risk of serious or Do not warm up the engine at low or high even fatal injury. revs when the vehicle is stationary; this Cold Starting Ensure that all the occupants of the causes the engine to warm up more Short trips and frequent cold starts will vehicle wear their seat belts correctly and STARTING AND OPERATING slowly, thereby increasing fuel not allow the engine to reach optimum that any children are positioned correctly on consumption and emissions. It is operating temperature. This results in a the dedicated child restraint systems. therefore advisable to drive off significant increase in consumption immediately, slowly, avoiding high levels (from +15 to +30% in city driving) speeds: by doing this the engine will and emissions. Transporting Animals warm up more quickly. The intervention of the airbags may be Traffic And Road Conditions dangerous for an animal on the front Unnecessary Actions High fuel consumption is caused by heavy seat. It is therefore advised to arrange Avoid revving up when starting at traffic traffic, for instance when travelling in animals on the rear seat inside dedicated lights or before stopping the engine. This traffic with frequent use of low gears or cages restrained by the vehicle’s seat action is unnecessary and causes in cities with many traffic lights. Winding belts. increased fuel consumption and mountain roads and rough road surfaces Keep in mind that, in the event of a pollution. also adversely affect consumption. sudden braking or an accident, an Gear Selection Stops In Traffic inadequately restrained animal may be Use a high gear when traffic and road During prolonged stops (e.g. railway projected within the passenger conditions allow it. Using a low gear for crossings) turn off the engine. compartment, risking injury to the animal faster acceleration will increase fuel itself and the other occupants of the consumption. Improper use of a high gear vehicle. increases consumption, emissions and engine wear. 164 Exhaust Gas Should an unusual noise from the exhaust For safe driving, it is essential, system or the presence of exhaust gas in particularly during the first days of use, Exhaust emissions are very dangerous, the passenger compartment be to get to know the car by driving carefully and may be lethal. They contain carbon identified, or if the underbody or rear and gradually discovering its monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas which section of the vehicle is damaged, have performance. can cause fainting and poisoning if the entire exhaust system and bodywork inhaled. Brakes areas checked to identify any To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, take components which are broken, damaged, The car braking system may be available the following measures: worn or have moved from their correct with four carbon-ceramic material brake Do not keep the engine running in fitting position. If any of these things discs, one on each wheel. closed spaces. occur, contact your authorized dealer. In order to guarantee the maximum If, for some reason (e.g. transporting Open welding or loose connections may braking capacity for the first use, Alfa bulky loads), it is necessary to drive with permit exhaust gas to enter the Romeo performs a "run-in" procedure for the trunk open, close all the windows and passenger compartment. discs and pads directly at the factory. run the climate control fan at maximum Check the exhaust system each time the The use of carbon-ceramic material speed. DO NOT activate air recirculation vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil brake discs guarantees braking features mode. change operations. Replace the (better deceleration/pedal load ratio, Should it be necessary to stay in the components if necessary, contact your braking distances, fading resistance) proportional to the dynamic features of stationary vehicle with engine running, authorized dealer. the car in addition to considerably adjust the ventilation/heating system Performance decreasing the unsprung component and operate the fan in such a way that This vehicle is equipped with an engine weight. outside air will enter the passenger capable of delivering exceptionally fast The materials used and the structural compartment. Activate the maximum fan acceleration and speed: features of the system could generate speed. Peak power: 505 HP at 6500 rpm. unusual noises which have absolutely no Maintenance of the exhaust system Peak torque: 443 ft-lbs at adverse effect on correct operation and provides the best protection against 2500–5000 rpm. reliability of the braking system. leaks of carbon monoxide into the Top speed: 190 mph (307 km/h). passenger compartment. Acceleration from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h): 3.9 seconds.

165 Greater pressure may need to be applied Preheating the carbon ceramic material to the brake pedal the first time to keep brake discs the same braking capacities in presence The brake discs must be warmed up to of condensation or salt on the braking make them fully efficient. Youare surfaces, for example after washing or if advised to perform the following the car is not used for a long time. procedure: Note: Given the high technological level Brake nine times from 80 mph to of this system, any servicing on it must be 18 mph (130 km/h to 30 km/h) with performed by your authorized dealer deceleration equal to 0.7g (the which exclusively has the skills needed longitudinal acceleration value is shown for the repair operations. on the instrument panel display by In case of intensive, high-performance setting RACE mode and selecting the use of the car, have the efficiency of the “Performance” page) with 20 second carbon-ceramic material braking system intervals between brake applications; inspected as shown on the Maintenance Plan at your authorized dealer. keep the car at a speed comprised

STARTING AND OPERATING between 37 mph and 62 mph (60 km/h Driving On Race Tracks and 100 km/h) and do not brake for Before driving on a track using a racing 4 minutes to allow the brakes to cool style, it is necessary to: down; Attend a race track driving course. Then brake three times from 124 mph Check the liquid levels in the engine to 18 mph (200 km/h to 30 km/h) with compartment. For more information, see deceleration equal to 1.1g (ABS the “Checking Levels” section in the operation) with 30 second intervals “Servicing And Maintenance” chapter. between brake applications; keep the car Have the car inspected at your at a speed comprised between 37 mph authorized dealer. and 62 mph (60 km/h and 100 km/h) and Remember that the car was not designed do not brake for 5 minutes to allow the to be driven exclusive on the race track brakes to cool down. and that this use increases stress and component wear.

166 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb? HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS .....168 At times, a problem such as these may BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 168 interfere with your driving experience. FUSES ...... 173 TIRE SERVICE KIT — The section on emergencies can help you IF EQUIPPED ...... 179 to deal with critical situations JUMP STARTING ...... 182 independently. REFUELING IN EMERGENCY .....185 In an emergency, we recommend that you ENGINE OVERHEATING ...... 185 call the phone number found in the TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . .186 Warranty Book. TOW EYES ...... 187 Youmay also consider contacting your ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE nearest authorized dealer. SYSTEM (EARS) ...... 188 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . .188

167 HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS BULB REPLACEMENT The Hazard Warning flasher switch is General Instructions located in the switch bank below the Before replacing a bulb, check the radio screen. contacts for oxidation. Push the switch once to Replace blown bulbs with others of the turn the hazard warning same type and power. flasher on. When the After replacing a headlight bulb, switch is activated, all always check its alignment. directional turn signals When a light is not working, check that will flash on and off to the corresponding fuse is intact before warn oncoming traffic 08016S0001EM of an emergency. Push the switch a Hazard Warning Switch changing the bulb. For the location of second time to turn the hazard warning fuses, refer to “Fuses” in this chapter. flashers off. Note: In some particular climate

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Caution! This is an emergency warning system and conditions, such as low temperature, it should not be used when the vehicle is humidity, or after washing the car, a thin in motion. Use it when your vehicle is Prolonged use of the hazard warning condensation layer may form on the disabled and is creating a safety hazard flashers may discharge the vehicle’s battery. internal surfaces of the front and rear for other motorists. headlights. This condensation will When you must leave the vehicle to seek disappear after switching on the assistance, the hazard warning flashers headlights. will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the STOP position. Note: With extended use the hazard warning flashers may discharge your battery.

168 Types Of Bulbs

The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs

Glass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder, press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.

Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.

Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the side and pull it out.

Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): To remove the bulb, contact an authorized dealer.

169 Replacement Bulbs

Light bulbs Type Power Front direction indicators PY24W 24 W Rear Fog lights H11 55 W Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D5S 25 W Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35 W Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1 W Glove compartment light W5W 4 W Deck lid light W5W 5 W IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5 W

170 Replacing Exterior Bulbs 3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly counterclockwise, and then slide it off Note: Only replace the bulb when the Caution! engine is off. Also ensure that the engine the headlight body. is cold, to prevent the risk of burns. Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Direction Indicators Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb To change the bulb of these lights, life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily proceed as follows: surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 1. Operating inside the engine compartment, remove the protective Replacing Interior Bulbs cover. Courtesy Mirror Light To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:

08026S0007EM 1. Lift the mirror cover and remove the Bulb/Connector lens, using a suitable tool. 4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the bulb holder. 5. Install the new bulb, making sure it is correctly inserted in the bulb holder.

08026S0023EM 6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in Protective Cover Location the housing on the headlight body and turn it clockwise, making sure that it is 2. Remove protective cover. locked correctly. 7. Install the protective cover. 08026S0008EM Front Light Cluster with Main Beam Sun Visor Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights 1 — Mirror Cover To replace the bulbs of the main beam 2 — Lens headlights, contact your authorized dealer. 2. Change the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts, then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is correctly fastened 08026S0006EM between the contacts. Protective Cover 171 3. Install the lens, inserting it firstly on 4. Install bulb, making sure that it is 2. Open protective cover up and remove one side and then pressing on the other correctly inserted fully. the bulb pulling out of the connector. side until it clicks into place. 5. Close the protective cover on the lens. Glove Compartment Light 6. Install courtesy light, inserting it first To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: on one side and then pressing on the 1. Open the glove compartment. other side until it clicks into place. 2. Remove the courtesy light assembly, Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights using a suitable tool. To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows: 1. Open the trunk, and remove the trunk lamp assembly using a suitable tool.

08026S0011EM Cover And Bulb Removal Direction IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly inserted fully. 4. Close the protective cover on the lens. 5. Install trunk lamp in the correct 08026S0009EM position, inserting it firstly on one side, Courtesy Lamp Indent and then pressing on the other side until 3. Open protective cover up and remove it clicks into place. the bulb pulling out of the connector. 08026S0010EM Ceiling Light Indent Puddle Lights On Door Panel To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: 1. Open the door and remove the puddle light assembly, using a suitable tool.

08026S0011EM Cover And Bulb Removal Direction 172 FUSES General Information The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current. When a device does not work, you must check the electrical circuit inside of the fuse for a break/melt. Also, please be aware that using power outlets for extended periods of time with

08026S0012EM the engine off may result in vehicle 08036S0002EM Puddle Light Indent battery discharge. J-CASE Fuse 2. Open protective cover up and remove 1 1 — Electrical Circuit the bulb pulling out of the connector. 2 — Case Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit 3 — Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit 2 Fuse Extracting Pliers To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked to the fuse box. 3

0726067916 Blade Fuses

08026S0011EM 1 — Electrical Circuit Cover And Bulb Removal Direction 2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit 3. Install bulb, making sure that it is 3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir- correctly inserted fully. cuit 4. Close the protective cover on the lens. 08036S0053EM 5. Install puddle light in the correct Fuse Box position, inserting it firstly on one side Grab the pliers from the upper tabs, and then pressing on the other side until press them, and extract the pliers pulling it clicks into place. upwards. 173 The pliers have two different ends, both Control Unit Under Passenger Side of which are specifically designed to Footboard Warning! remove the different types of fuses To access the fuses, proceed as follows: present in the vehicle: When replacing a blown fuse, always use 1. Lift the upper end of the footboard on an appropriate replacement fuse with the the passenger side, pulling to release the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never two buttons. replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 08036S0005EM disengaged. Fuse Extracting Pliers If the replaced fuse blows again, contact 1 — MINI fuse an authorized dealer. 2 — J-CASE fuse If a general protection fuse for safety 08036S0010EM systems (air bag system, braking system), Release Buttons On Footboard power unit systems (engine system, After use, return the pliers to their proper transmission system) or steering system position by following the below blows, contact an authorized dealer. 1 — Footboard procedures: Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs Fuse Location and insert them into their housing. Push downward on the pliers into their The fuses, which can be replaced by the user, are grouped in two boxes below the housing until they click into place. passenger side foot board and inside the trunk.

174 2. Unscrewing the two hooks, remove Luggage Compartment Fuse Box The fuses are freely accessible on the the panel pulling downward. control unit. To access the fuses, proceed as follows: The number identifying the electrical 1. Lift the luggage compartment cover. component corresponding to each fuse is shown on the cover. 2. Remove the control unit cover. After replacing a fuse, make sure that you have closed cover correctly.

08036S0011EM Release Hooks On Footboard

2 — Panel 08036S0014EM Control Unit The fuses are freely accessible on the control unit. After replacing the fuse, make sure that panel and footboard are correctly locked.

175 Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

08036S0013EM Passenger Side Control Unit

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Front power window (driver side) F33 25 Front power window (passenger side) F34 25 Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control F36 15 system, Alarm, Power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped), Doors F38 20 unlock, Central lock Windshield washer pump F43 20 176 FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Rear left power window F47 25 Rear right power window F48 25 Heater rear window coil F94 15

177 Luggage Compartment Fuse Box IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

08036S0015EM Luggage Compartment Control Unit

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Tow hook module (TTM) F1 40 Hi-Fi system F8 30 KL15/a USB Recharge (C070) F17 7.5 I-Drive / USB / AUX port F21 10 KL15/a 12V Power outlet (R053) F22 20

178 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF An instruction pamphlet for reference To use the Tire Service Kit, proceed as EQUIPPED in prompt and correct use of the Tire follows: Service Kit, which must be then given to Description the personnel dealing with the 1. Stop the vehicle in a position where sealant-treated tire. you can repair the tire safely. Youshould If a tire is punctured, you can make a first be as far as possible from the side of the emergency repair using the Tire Sevice A pair of protective gloves. road, and in a position that is not Kit located in the rear storage area under dangerous for oncoming traffic. Engage the load floor. Some adaptors, for inflating different elements. the hazard warning flashers, remove the Note: Vehicles equipped with Run Flat safety triangle from the luggage Tires will not be equipped with a Tire compartment, and place it at a suitable Service Kit. distance from the vehicle to make other drivers aware of your presence. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the tire service kit hoses to reach the valve stem and keep the tire repair kit flat on the ground.

08066S0002EM 3. Shift the gear selector to PARK (P). Tire Service Kit Components 4. Apply the electric park brake and turn 08066S0001EM 1— Sealant Cartridge the engine OFF. Tire Service Kit Location 2— Filler Tube 3— Adhesive Label Inflation Procedure The Tire Service Kit includes: 4— Air Compressor Sealant cartridge containing the Warning! sealing fluid. Note: The sealing fluid is effective with Filler tube. external temperatures of between -40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C). The sealing Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of Adhesive label with the writing "Max. fluid has an expiration date. the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough 50 mph (80 km/h)”, to be attached in a off the road to avoid the danger of being hit position easily visible to the driver (eg. on when using the Tire Service Kit. the dashboard) after repairing the tire. Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the Air compressor, complete with vehicle under the following circumstances: pressure gauge and connectors. 179 If the puncture in the tire tread is Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains 3. Make sure the power switch of the approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, compressor is in the off position (O). consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire If the tire has any sidewall damage. Service Kit out of reach of children. If 4. Insert the plug into the power outlet in the center console, then start the engine. If the tire has any damage from driving swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with with extremely low tire pressure. plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician If the tire has any damage from driving on immediately. a flat tire.

If the wheel has any damage. To use your Tire Service Kit, proceed as If you are unsure of the condition of the follows: tire or the wheel. 1. Engage the electric park brake. Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat sources. 2. Insert the sealant cartridge containing the sealing liquid in the proper IN CASE OF EMERGENCY A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the compressor holder, pushing down hard. 08066S0006EM occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Unscrew the tire valve cap, take out the Center Console Power Outlet Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure filler tube and tighten the fitting on the 5. Start the compressor by placing the to follow these warnings can result in injuries tire valve. that are serious or fatal to you, your power switch in the on position (I). passengers, and others around you. 6. Inflate the tire to the pressure Take care not to allow the contents of indicated on the tire placard, located on Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is of the driver’s side door. Refer to “Tires” harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed in “Servicing And Maintenance” for more through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and information. In order to obtain a more respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact precise reading, check the pressure value with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as on pressure gauge with the compressor possible, if there is any contact with clothing. off.

08066S0004EM Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire 1— Sealant Cartridge 2— Filler Tube

180 9. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles 12. Apply the adhesive label from the (8 km), stop, engage the electric park sealant bottle where it can be easily seen brake, and recheck the tire pressure. by the driver as a reminder that the tire has been treated with a Tire Service Kit, 10. If the pressure is less than 26 psi as well as not to exceed the speed (1.8 bar), DO NOT drive the vehicle, and restriction for the treated tire. see an authorized dealer. 11. If a pressure value of at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) is detected, restore the correct Warning! pressure (with engine running and electric park brake engaged), and drive 08066S0005EM Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker Air Compressor immediately with great care to an to the padded area on the steering wheel. authorized dealer. Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the 5— Power Switch padded area on the steering wheel is 6— Pressure Gauge dangerous because the air bag may not Warning! operate (deploy) normally resulting in serious injury. In addition, do not adhere the 7. If the pressure is not at least 26.1 psi sticker to areas where warning lights or the (1.8 bar) after 15 minutes, disengage the Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire speedometer cannot be viewed. compressor from the valve and power repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired outlet. Then, move the vehicle forwards or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do approximately five tire turns in order to not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is Checking And Restoring Tire Pressure distribute the sealing fluid inside the tire repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this The compressor can also be used to warning can result in injuries that are serious evenly, and then repeat the inflation check and, if necessary, restore the tire operation. or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as pressure. 8. If you still cannot obtain a pressure of possible at an authorized dealer. Proceed as follows: at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within 1. Release the quick connector and 15 minutes from the compressor connect it directly to the valve of the tire switching on, do not drive the vehicle, and to be inflated. contact an authorized dealer.

181 2. Push the air release button. 2. Insert the new sealant cartridge by JUMP STARTING pushing downward firmly. If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. Note: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions. 08066S0008EM Air Compressor Components 08066S0009EM Sealant Cartridge Replacement Warning! 7— Air Release Button IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 8— Quick Connector 1— Sealant Cartridge 9— Release Button 9— Release Button Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and Sealant Cartridge Replacement cause personal injury. Note: Only use original cartridges, which can be purchased at an authorized dealer. Caution! Proceed as follows: 1. Remove the sealant cartridge by Do not use a portable battery booster pack pushing the release button located on the or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to side of the compressor. the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.

182 Remote Battery Connection Posts Jump Starting The negative terminal (-) is positioned next to the passenger side hood lock. Warning!

Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

08076S0004EM Caution! Protective Flap Opening

Failure to follow these procedures could 08076S0006EM result in damage to the charging system of Remote Post Location the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

Preparation For Jump Starting: Warning! 1. Firmly apply the parking brake, and turn the ignition to the STOP position. Do not connect the jumper cable to the 2. Switch off all electrical features in the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. vehicle. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in 3. If using another vehicle to jump start serious injury. Only use the specific ground 08076S0005EM Remote Post Location the battery, park the vehicle within the point, do not use any other exposed metal jumper cables reach, set the parking parts. To carry out the operation, you need to brake and make sure the ignition is in have the correct cables to connect to the STOP position. The positive post (+) can be accessed by battery of another vehicle or a portable lifting the protective flap. battery booster pack to the remote posts of the discharged battery. Usually, these Warning! cables have terminals at the ends and are identified by different sheath colors (red = positive, black = negative). Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. 183 Cable Connection 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a Proceed as follows to perform a jump Caution! starting procedure: few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. If 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the using a portable battery booster pack, Accessories plugged into the vehicle power jumper cable to the positive (+) post of before starting the vehicle, wait a few outlets draw power from the vehicle’s the vehicle with the discharged battery seconds after completing the connection. battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long 2. Connect the opposite end of the Cable Disconnection enough without engine operation, the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive Once the engine is started, remove the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently (+) post of the booster battery. connection cables in reverse sequence, to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the as described below: jumper cable to the negative (-) post of 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper the booster battery. cable from the engine (-) ground of the Bump Starting vehicle with the discharged battery. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 4. Connect the opposite end of the Never jump start the engine by pushing, towing or coasting downhill. negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the ground of the vehicle with the discharged jumper cable from the negative (-) post of Note: Youcannot start a vehicle with an battery (exposed metal part of the the booster battery. automatic transmission by pushing it. engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system. 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the Caution! positive (+) post of the booster battery. Warning! 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the Accessories plugged into the vehicle power jumper cable from the positive (+) post of outlets draw power from the vehicle’s the vehicle with the discharged battery. battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular Do not connect the jumper cable to the phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long negative (-) post of the discharged battery. If frequent jump starting is required to enough without engine operation, the The resulting electrical spark could cause start your vehicle, you should have the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently the battery to explode and could result in battery and charging system inspected at to degrade battery life and/or prevent the serious injury. Only use the specific ground your authorized dealer. engine from starting. point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.

184 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ENGINE OVERHEATING Refueling in an emergency is described in Engine overheating may occur in Warning! "Refueling The Vehicle" in "Starting And situations of extreme environmental Operating". temperatures, frequent engine stops/starts, or driving in heavy traffic. If Youor others can be badly burned by hot the engine becomes overheated, the engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from Engine TemperatureWarning Light in the your radiator. If you see or hear steam instrument cluster will illuminate along coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. with a dedicated message. Refer to Never try to open a cooling system pressure "Warning Lights And Messages" in the cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel" hot. for more information. In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by Caution! taking the appropriate action. On the highways — slow down. Driving with a hot cooling system could In city traffic — while stopped, place damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle increase engine idle speed. the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal Note: There are steps that you can take range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn to slow down an impending overheat the engine off immediately, and call for condition: service. If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the If Steam Is Coming From The Engine engine cooling system and turning the Compartment A/C off can help remove this heat. Do not go near the front of the vehicle. Youcan also turn the temperature Stop the engine. Wait until the steam control to maximum heat, the mode dissipates. Then, open the hood and start control to floor and the blower control to the engine. high. This allows the heater core to act If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is as a supplement to the radiator and aids Escaping in removing heat from the engine cooling Open the hood and idle the engine until it system. cools.

185 Note: TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE The operators of the assistance vehicle must be informed of your vehicle's If the cooling fan does not operate This section describes procedures for minimum required height from the while the engine is running, the engine towing a disabled vehicle using a ground, in order to avoid contact temperature will increase. Stop the commercial towing service. between the ends of the bumpers and the engine and contact your authorized equipment of the breakdown truck. dealer. Caution! The following image illustrates the front If the engine continues to overheat or and rear attachment corners of the frequently overheats, have the cooling vehicle, which are to be taken into system inspected. The engine could be The vehicle should be transported with all consideration when loading your vehicle seriously damaged unless repairs are four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of onto the assistance vehicle. made. Contact your authorized dealer. a roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid towing with only the front (or rear) wheels lifted. When towing with only the front (or rear) wheels lifted, in addition to damaging the

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY body, it could damage the transmission. Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur. When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. 08126S0001EM Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is Front And Rear Loading Angles released, and remain released, while being towed.

Damage from improper towing is not Loading Angles covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A 12.045° B 11.830°

186 Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models TOW EYES 2. Remove the tow eye from its housing in the trunk and carefully clean the It is recommended to tow the vehicle If the vehicle has been in an accident or threaded housing on the vehicle before with all four wheels OFF the ground on has broken down, a tow eye is provided in using it. the flatbed of a roadside assistance the tools container located inside the vehicle. luggage compartment for vehicle towing. 3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in place Towing is meant only for short distances (about 11 turns). on a paved road surface. Note: The largest work angle of a tow Caution! Proceed as follows to use the tow eye: cable to fix on the tow hook must not exceed 15°. 1. Unhook the cap on the front or rear Do not use sling type equipment when bumper (if equipped), pushing on the towing. Vehicle damage may occur. upper part. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed.

If an assistance vehicle with a flatbed is 08136S0002EM not available, the vehicle must be towed Work Angle Of Tow Cable with the rear wheels lifted from the 08136S0001EM ground using a trailer or special Front Tow Eye Cap equipment allowing lifting of the rear Warning! wheels. Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes. Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death. Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow straps may break or become disengaged, causing serious injury or death.

08136S0003EM Rear Tow Eye Cap 187 Failure to follow proper tow eye usage ENHANCED ACCIDENT EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) may cause components to break resulting in RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Event serious injury or death. This vehicle is equipped with an Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Enhanced Accident Response System. of an EDR is to record data that will Caution! Please refer to “Occupant Restraint assist in understanding how a vehicle’s Systems” in “Safety” for further systems performed under certain crash information on the Enhanced Accident or near crash-like situations, such as an The tow eye must be used exclusively for Response System (EARS) function. air bag deployment or hitting a road roadside assistance operations. Only use the obstacle. tow eye with an appropriate device in Please refer to “Occupant Restraint accordance with the highway code (a rigid Systems” in “Safety” for further bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a short distance to the nearest service location. information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR). Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY vehicles off the road or where there are obstacles. In compliance with the above conditions, towing with a tow eye must take place with two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as possible along the same center line. Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guidelines are not followed. When towing, only use a facility that can tow vehicles with low ground clearances as extensive damage can result by using a standard tow truck platform.

188 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Correct servicing permits the SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 190 performance of the vehicle to be ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 194 maintained over time, as well as limited BATTERY RECHARGING ...... 197 running costs and safeguarding the DEALER SERVICE ...... 198 efficiency of the safety systems. RAISING THE VEHICLE ...... 204 This chapter explains how. TIRES ...... 205 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...... 219 STORING THE VEHICLE ...... 220 BODYWORK...... 221 INTERIORS ...... 222

189 SCHEDULED SERVICING Periodic Checks Intheeventofalongperiodof inactivity. Correct servicing is crucial for Every month or every 600 miles guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle ( 1,000 km) or before long trips check The following checks must be carried out under the best conditions. and, if necessary, top off: more often than indicated in the Scheduled Servicing Plan: For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned Engine coolant level. Check cleanliness of hood and trunk a series of checks and services for your Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see vehicle at fixed intervals based on your authorized dealer as soon as locks, cleanliness and lubrication of distance and time, as described in the possible). linkage. Scheduled Servicing Plan. Windshield washer fluid level. Visually inspect conditions of: engine, Before each service, it is always Tire inflation pressure and condition. transmission, pipes and hoses necessary to carefully follow the Operation of lighting system (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber instructions in the Scheduled Servicing (headlights, direction indicators, hazard elements (sleeves/bushes, etc.). Plan (e.g. periodically check level of warning lights, etc.). Check battery charge and battery fluid fluids, tire pressure, etc.). Operation of windshield level (electrolyte). Scheduled Servicing is offered by an washing/wiping system and Visually inspect conditions of the authorized dealer according to a set time positioning/wear of wiper blades. accessory drive belts. schedule. If, during each operation, in Check and, if necessary, change engine addition to the ones scheduled, the need Every 2,000 miles ( 3,000 km), check and SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE top off if required: oil and replace oil filter. arises for further replacements or Check and, if necessary, replace cabin repairs, these may be carried out with the Engine oil level. air filter. owner’s explicit consent only. Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle Check and, if necessary, replace air Note: Scheduled Servicing intervals are If the vehicle is used under one of the cleaner. required by the Manufacturer. Failure to following conditions: have them carried out may invalidate the Severe Duty All Models Dusty roads. New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles Short, repeated journeys less than Youare advised to inform your (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a 4 miles (7-8 km) at sub-zero outside authorized dealer of any small operating dusty and off-road environment or is irregularities without waiting for the next temperatures. operated predominately at idle or only service. Engine often idling or driving long very low engine RPM’s. This type of distances at low speeds or long periods vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. of inactivity.

190 Maintenance Plan (2.9 V6 Engine)

Thousands of miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 32 48 64 80 96

Thousands of kilometers 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary. Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and expiration ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● date. Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, deck lid, passenger ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.). Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels.(1) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool). ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), ●●●●●●● rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.). Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade. ●●●●●●●● Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system and ●●●●●●●● adjust nozzles, if necessary. Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks, ●●●●●●● cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.

(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the system is intact. 191 Thousands of miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 32 48 64 80 96

Thousands of kilometers 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● pads and operation of pad wear indicators. Brake disc wear status check with diagnostic tool. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Visually inspect the brake discs surface and edge. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Brake pads/brake discs replacement. (2) Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the ●●● ●●● ●●● ●●● accessory drive belt(s).

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Change engine coolant ● Change engine oil and replace oil filter. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Replace accessory drive belt/s. (3) Replace air cleaner cartridge (4) ●●●●●●● Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped). ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Change the brake fluid. (5)

(2) The actual interval for changing the brake pads and the carbon ceramic brake discs depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message on the instrument panel. It is advisable to check brake disc weight and thickness after each intensive use. (3) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,00 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 2 years. (4) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). (5) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage. 192 Thousands of miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

Years 123456789101112131415 16 32 48 64 80 96

Thousands of kilometers 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240

Replace the cabin air filter (6) o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o Spark plug replacement.* ●●●●●

(6) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). * The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearlyintervals do not apply. (o) Recommended operations (●) Mandatory operations

Warning!

Youcan be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

193 ENGINE COMPARTMENT Checking Levels 2.9L V6 engine, SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

09026S0001EM 1 – Engine Oil Dipstick 4 – Windshield/Headlight Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 2 – Engine Oil Filler 5 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap Access Cover 3 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 6 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap

194 Engine Oil Note: Always reinstall the oil cap and tighten to proper torque whenever it is The engine oil level can be seen on the Warning! instrument cluster display every time the removed to add oil to engine. Never run engine is started, or on the Information the engine with cap removed this could and Entertainment system display by cause oil to leak from engine. If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for activating on the main menu (MENU Manual oil level checking procedure the engine to cool down before loosening the button) the following functions in filler cap, particularly for vehicles with Check that the oil level is between the sequence: “Apps”; “My Car” and “Oil aluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk MIN and MAX marks on dipstick, clean it Level”. of burns! with a lint-free cloth and reinsert it. Check on the display using the 6 notches Extract the dipstick again and check that that the oil level is between the MIN and the level is between the MIN and MAX Caution! MAX level: 1 notch MIN level, 6 notches marks. MAX level. If the oil level is close to or below the MIN Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update On Display The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark, add oil gradually through the filler, mark. (refer to “Top-Up And Oil Level Indication If a engine oil top-off is needed, in order Update On Display” in this section) to ensure the correct indication of the oil If the MAX mark is exceeded MAX (last considering that each notch shown on the level on the display, leave the vehicle on notch on the right turns red) after the fill-up, flat ground with the engine running for go to your authorized dealer as soon as display corresponds to approximately possible to have the oil in excess removed. 8.8floz(250ml). approximately 5 minutes (temperature The oil level can also be checked manually. higher than 176°F (80°C)) and shut the Do not add oil with specifications engine off then proceed with the process different from those of the oil already in the below: engine. Caution! Wait for five minutes, turn the ignition Used engine oil and oil filters contain to the ON mode without starting the substances which are harmful to the engine and wait for a few seconds. environment. To change the oil and filters, we Make sure not to add too much oil when advise you to contact your authorized Note: If you have added the specified dealer. topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess amount of oil and the indicator is not may damage the engine. Have the vehicle reading “Full”, please contact you checked. Never exceed the MAX level when Engine Coolant Fluid topping off engine oil. It is advisable to check authorized dealer. the oil level in intermediate steps using the If the level is too low, unscrew the cap of oil dipstick. reservoir and add the fluid described in The oil level is not refreshed immediately on the "Technical Specifications" chapter. the display after topping off. Consequently, wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the display and follow the procedure below. 195 Washer Fluid For Windshield/ Useful Advice For Extending The Life Headlights Of YourBattery Caution! The windshield and headlights washer To avoid draining your battery and make fluid reservoir (if equipped) has a it last longer, observe the following telescopic filler. instructions: If the charge level remains under 50% for a If the level is too low, remove reservoir When you park the car, ensure that the long time, the battery may be damaged by cap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluid sulphation, reducing its capacity and doors and trunk are closed properly to efficiency at start the vehicle. The battery is described in the "Technical prevent any lights from remaining on also more prone to the risk of freezing (at Specifications" chapter. inside the passenger's compartment. temperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C). Note: The headlight washing system will Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, not work if the liquid level is low (as hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on Note: After the battery is disconnected, indicated by the symbol on the for a long time when the engine is not the steering must be initialized. The instrument cluster display). The warning light on the instrument panel windshield washer will keep working. On running. switches on to indicate this. To carry out vehicles equipped with headlight Before performing any operation on this procedure, simply turn the steering washers, if equipped, there is a reference the electrical system, disconnect the wheel all the way from one end to the notch on the dipstick: ONLYthe negative battery cable. other, and then turn it back to the central windshield/rear window washer operates If you wish to install electrical position.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE with the level below this reference. accessories after purchasing the car that Battery Brake Fluid require permanent electrical supply (e.g. alarm, etc.), or accessories which The battery does not require the Check that the fluid is at the maximum influence the electrical supply electrolyte to be topped up with distilled level. If the fluid level in the tank is low, requirements, contact your authorized water. A periodic check carried out at an contact your authorized dealer to have dealer, whose qualified staff will evaluate authorized dealer, however, is necessary the system checked. the overall electrical consumption. to check efficiency. Automatic Transmission Activation Follow the battery manufacturer's System Oil instructions for maintenance. The transmission control oil level should Replacing The Battery only be checked at your authorized If necessary, replace the battery with dealer. another original battery with the same specifications. Follow the battery manufacturer’s instructions for maintenance.

196 BATTERY RECHARGING Youcan recharge the battery without disconnecting the wires of the vehicle's Warning! Important Notes electrical system. To reach the battery, remove the Battery acid is a corrosive solution and Warning! access panel inside the trunk. can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery acid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when Never charge or recharge a frozen attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or battery: it may explode because of the on skin, flush the area immediately with nitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals. large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for At all times while charging or recharging further information. the battery, make sure that any sparks or open flames are kept sufficiently far away Battery gas is flammable and explosive. from the battery. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than Note: 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch 09036S0001EM each other. Before using the charging device, Battery Access Panel always make sure that it is appropriate Battery posts, terminals, and related Remove the protective cover and for the installed battery, with constant accessories contain lead and lead connect the positive cable terminal of the voltage (below 14.8 V) and low compounds. Wash hands after handling. charger (usually red) to the positive amperage (maximum 15 A). terminal (+) of the battery. Recharge the battery in a well Note: It will not be possible to open the Connect the negative terminal of the ventilated environment. trunk with a key or by pressing the button charger (usually black) to nut next to the in the passenger compartment when the Before using any devices to charge or negative terminal (-) of the battery. battery is disconnected. So, always to maintain the charge of the battery, position the manual trunk opening strap carefully follow the instructions on the trunk lock before disconnecting provided with the device in order to the battery. The procedure is described in properly and safely connect it to the car the "Storing The Vehicle" paragraph in battery. this chapter.

197 For a correct charge/discharge DEALER SERVICE procedure, the charge voltage must go through the IBS sensor. The following pages contain instructions on the required maintenance from the 1. Turn the charger on and follow the technical personnel who designed the instructions on the user's manual to vehicle. completely recharge the battery. In addition to these specific maintenance 2. When the battery is charged, turn the instructions specified for routine charger off before disconnecting it from scheduled servicing, there are other the battery. components which may require periodic maintenance or replacement over the 09036S0002EM 3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of vehicle’s life cycle. Battery the battery charger and then the red Engine Oil 1 — Protective Cover cable terminal. 2 — Negative Post (Nut) Engine Oil Level Check 4. Refit the protective cover of the positive terminal of the battery and the To ensure correct engine lubrication, the The vehicle is equipped with an IBS access cover to the battery oil must always be kept at the prescribed (Intelligent Battery Sensor), which is able compartment. level (see "Engine Compartment" in this to measure the charge and discharge chapter). SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Note: If a "quick-type" battery charger is voltage and calculate the charge level used with the battery fitted on the Check the oil level at regular intervals, for and the general condition of the battery. vehicle, before connecting it disconnect example every 1864 miles (3000 km). The sensor is placed next to the negative both cables of the battery itself. Do not It must be checked about five minutes terminal (-) of the battery. use a "quick-type" battery charger to after stopping the engine, once full provide the starting voltage. operating temperature is reached. The vehicle must also be parked on as level a surface as possible. The engine oil level can be checked using the Information and Entertainment system. To access the function, activate the main menu (MENU button) and select the following options in sequence: “Applications”; “My Car”; “Oil level”.

198 Changing The Engine Oil Air Filter See the "Maintenance Plan" for the Replacing The Air Cleaner Warning! correct servicing intervals. See the "Maintenance Plan" for the Choice Of Engine Oil Type correct servicing intervals. It is advised to Use only refrigerants and compressor To ensure optimal performance and replace it with a genuine spare part, lubricants approved by the manufacturer for maximum protection in all operating specifically designed for this vehicle. your air conditioning system. Some conditions, it is advisable to use solely Air Conditioning System Maintenance unapproved refrigerants are flammable and certified engine oils (see description in can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved "Fluid And Lubricants" in the "Technical To ensure the best possible performance, refrigerants or lubricants can cause the Specifications" chapter). the air conditioning system must be system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer checked and undergo maintenance at an to Warranty Information Book, located in Additives For Engine Oil authorized dealer at the beginning of the your owner’s information kit, for further It is strongly recommended not to use summer. warranty information. additives (other than leak detection dyes) with the engine oil. Lubricating Moving Parts Of The The engine oil is a product designed Caution! Bodywork specially for the vehicle and its Ensure that the locks and bodywork performance may be deteriorated junction points, including components through the use of further additives. Do not use chemicals to clean the air conditioning system, since the internal such as the seat guides, door hinges (and Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And Filters components may be damaged. This kind of rollers), trunk and hood are periodically For the disposal of the engine oil and damage is not covered by warranty. lubricated with lithium-based grease to filters, contact the appropriate body to ensure correct, silent operation and to protect them from rust and wear. determine local regulations. Replace The Cabin Air Filter Note: Used engine oil disposed of Thoroughly clean the components, See the "Maintenance Plan" for the eliminating every trace of dirt and dust. incorrectly may seriously harm the correct servicing intervals. For cleaner environment. After lubricating, eliminate excess oil and replacement, contact an authorized grease. Also pay particular attention to Engine Oil Filter dealer. the hood closing devices, to ensure Replacing The Engine Oil Filter correct operation. During operations on the hood, to be carried out with the The engine oil filter must be replaced engine cold, also remember to check, each time the engine oil is changed. It is clean and lubricate the locking, release advised to replace it with a genuine spare and safety devices. part, specifically designed for this vehicle.

199 Lubricate the external lock barrels twice To activate this function, move the lever a year. Apply a small amount of upward for at least three seconds. Warning! high-quality lubricant directly into the lock barrel. If necessary, contact your authorized Driving with worn windshield wiper blades is dealer as soon as possible. a serious hazard, because visibility is reduced in bad weather conditions. Windshield Wiper Periodically clean the windshield and rear Note: The life of the windshield wiper window and rubber profile of the blades varies according to the usage windshield wiper blades, using a sponge frequency. In any case, it is advised to or a soft cloth and a non-abrasive replace the blades approximately once a detergent. This eliminates the salt or year. When the blades are worn, noise, impurities accumulated when driving. 09046S0001EM marks on the glass or streaks of water Multifunction Lever Prolonged operation of the windshield may be noticed. In the presence of these window wipers with dry glass may cause conditions, clean the windshield wiper Function Deactivation the deterioration of the blades, in blades or, if necessary, replace them. The function is deactivated if: addition to abrasion of the surface of the Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades More than two minutes passes before glass. To eliminate the impurities on the SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ("Service Position" Function) cycling the ignition to the STOP position dry glass, always operate the windshield after having raised the lever and putting washers. The "service position" function allows the driver to replace the windshield wiper the wipers into service position. In the event of very low outdoor blades more easily. It is also The ignition is cycled to the ON temperatures, below zero degrees, recommended to activate this function position and the windshield wiper control ensure that the movement of the rubber when it is snowing and to make it easier is used. part in contact with the glass is not to remove any dirt deposits in the area obstructed. Use a suitable deicing If, after using the function, the ignition is where the blades are normally product to release it if required. set back to ON with the blades in a positioned, when washing. Avoid using the windshield wipers to position other than rest position (at the remove frost or ice. Activation Of The Function base of the windshield), they will only return to rest position following a To activate this function, disable the Also avoid contact of the rubber profile command given using the stalk (stalk windshield wiper before setting the of the blades with petroleum derivatives upwards, into unstable position) or when ignition device to STOP. such as engine oil, gas, etc. a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded. This function can only be activated within two minutes of cycling the ignition to STOP. 200 Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades Open welding or loose connections may Proceed as follows: permit exhaust gas to enter the passenger compartment. 1. Raise the wiper arm, press tab of the Have the exhaust system checked every attachment spring and remove the blade time the vehicle is raised. Replace the from the arm. components where necessary (for these operations, contact an authorized dealer). In normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter does not require

09046S0003EM maintenance. To ensure that it operates Windshield Washers correctly, however, and prevent it from getting damaged, it is extremely 1 — Washer Nozzles important that the engine operates perfectly. Then, check that the nozzle holes are not To minimize the risk of damaging the 09046S0002EM clogged; use a needle to unblock them if catalytic converter, proceed as follows: Wiper Release Tab necessary. Do not stop the engine or deactivate 2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in Exhaust System the ignition with gear engaged and the dedicated housing in the arm and vehicle in motion. checking that it is locked. Adequate maintenance of the engine Do not attempt to start the engine by exhaust system represents the best bump starting. 3. Lower the wiper arm onto the protection against leaks of carbon Do not persist in using the vehicle if windshield. monoxide into the passenger Note: Do not operate the windshield compartment. idling is very irregular or the operating conditions are very notably irregular. wiper with the blades lifted from the If an unusual noise from the exhaust or windshield. the presence of smoke in the passenger Windshield Washer compartment is identified, or if the Warning! underbody or rear section of the vehicle The window washer nozzles are fixed. If have been damaged, have the entire there is no jet of fluid, first check that exhaust system and adjoining bodywork Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They there is fluid in the reservoir (see areas checked at your authorized dealer contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is paragraph “Engine Compartment” in this to identify any components which are colorless and odorless. Breathing it can chapter). broken, damaged, worn or have moved make you unconscious and can eventually from their correct fitting position. poison you.

201 A hot exhaust system can start a fire if Youor others can be badly burned by hot With the engine off and at normal you park over materials that can burn. Such engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from operating temperature, check that the materials might be grass or leaves coming your radiator. If you see or hear steam cooling system radiator cap is closed into contact with your exhaust system. Do coming from under the hood, do not open the properly. not park or operate your vehicle in areas hood until the radiator has had time to cool. where your exhaust system can contact Never try to open a cooling system pressure anything that can burn. cap when the radiator is hot. Warning!

Cooling System Coolant Check Do not open hot engine cooling system. Yourvehicle has two cooling systems and Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when they both need to be checked to ensure the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or Warning! they are at proper fill levels. Refer to the remove the cap to cool an overheated “Engine Compartment” section for the engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in locations. the cooling system. To prevent scalding or Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan injury, do not remove the pressure cap while motor lead before working near the radiator Check the engine coolant and intercooler the system is hot or under pressure. cooling fan. coolant level every oil change or before long trips. Do not use a pressure cap other than the Youor others can be badly burned by hot one specified for your vehicle. Personal engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from If there are impurities in the engine injury or engine damage may result.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE your radiator. If you see or hear steam coolant, the system must be drained, coming from under the hood, do not open the flushed and refilled: contact an hood until the radiator has had time to cool. authorized dealer. Note: Before removing the coolant Never open a cooling system pressure cap reservoir cap, wait for the system to cool when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. Check the front part of the condenser to down. check for any build-up of insects, leaves Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry or other debris. Should it be dirty, clean it Topping Up / Draining / Flushing The away from the radiator cooling fan when the by spraying delicately with water. Engine/Intercooler Coolant hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the Check the hoses of the engine/ If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, engine is running or not. intercooler cooling system to ensure that have cleaning and flushing carried out at the rubber has not deteriorated and that an authorized dealer. When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn there are no cracks, tears, cuts or See the "Maintenance Plan" for the the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is obstructions in the expansion tank side correct servicing intervals. temperature controlled and can start at any and radiator side connectors. Should time the ignition is in the ON mode. there be any doubt regarding leaks from Note: the system (e.g. if frequent top ups are For topping up, use a fluid with the required), have the seal checked at an same characteristics as those indicated authorized dealer. in the "Fluids And Lubricants" table (see "Technical Specifications" chapter). 202 Do not use pure water, alcohol-based Note: brakes from overheating: excess pad coolants, corrosions inhibitors or To prevent the fluid from being wear may cause damage to the braking additional anti-rust products because ingested by children or animals, do not system. they may be incompatible with the keep it in open containers or pour it on When an insufficient oil level is engine coolant and cause the clogging the ground. If ingested, contact a doctor detected, contact an authorized dealer of the radiator. The use of propylene immediately. Eliminate any traces of to have the system checked. glycol-based coolant is also not fluid from the ground immediately. Always keep the cap of the brake recommended. When the vehicle stops after a short fluid reservoir (in the engine Engine Cooling/Intercooler System Cap trip, steam may be seen coming out compartment) completely closed. To prevent loss of engine coolant, make from front of the hood. This is a normal phenomenon which is due to the sure that the expansion tank cap is Warning! closed. If it is open, screw it completely presence of rain, snow or a lot of until you reach/hear the click. moisture on the surface of the radiator. Periodically check the cap and clean it With engine and system cold, do not Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” from any foreign bodies that may have top up with coolant beyond the deposited on the external surface. in “Technical Specifications” for further maximum level indicated on the information. Using the wrong type of brake reservoir in the engine compartment. fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The Warning! Braking System proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is In order to guarantee the efficiency of also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. Never add coolant with the engine hot or the braking system, periodically check its overheated. components; for this operation, contact To avoid contamination from foreign an authorized dealer. matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid Do not attempt to cool an overheated or fluid that has been in a tightly closed engine by loosening or removing the cap. The See the "Maintenance Plan" for the container. Keep the master cylinder heat causes a considerable increase in correct servicing intervals. reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake pressure in the cooling system. Note: Driving with your foot resting on fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. To prevent damage to the engine, only the brake pedal may compromise its use the engine cooling circuit caps provided. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during efficiency, increasing the risk of hard or prolonged braking, resulting in accidents. When driving, never keep your sudden brake failure. This could result in a Disposal of Used Coolant foot on the brake pedal and don’t put collision. Disposal of engine/intercooler coolant is unnecessary strain on it to prevent the subject to legal requirements: contact the appropriate body to determine local regulations. 203 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can Frequency of Oil Changes RAISING THE VEHICLE result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine In normal vehicle operating conditions, it If the vehicle requires lifting, visit an parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. is not necessary to change the authorized dealer which is equipped with Brake fluid can also damage painted and transmission oil. shop jacks or jack arms. vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. The vehicle lifting points are marked on the side skirts with the symbols. Do not allow petroleum based fluid to Caution! contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your result in a collision. authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to Automatic Transmission adjust the fluid level accurately. Use only a transmission oil with the same characteristics as those indicated in the Replacing The Battery "Fluids and Lubricants" table (see If necessary, replace the battery with "Technical Specifications" chapter). another battery with the same 09056S0001EM Special Additives specifications. It is advised to contact an Vehicle Lift Point Locations SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Do not use any type of additive with the authorized dealer for replacement. automatic transmission oil. The Follow the battery manufacturer's automatic transmission oil is a product instructions for maintenance. designed specially for this vehicle and its Note: It will not be possible to open the performance may be compromised trunk with a key or by pressing the button through the use of further additives. in the passenger compartment when the battery is disconnected. So, always position the manual trunk opening strap Caution! on the trunk lock before disconnecting the battery. The procedure is described in the "Storing The Vehicle" section in this Do not use chemical flushes in your chapter. transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

204 TIRES Note: Tire Safety Information P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. Tire safety information will cover aspects P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded of the following information: Tire into the sidewall preceding the size Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, designation. Example: P215/ Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire 65R15 95H. Pressures, and Tire Loading. European — Metric tire sizing is Tire Markings based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. LT(Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the 0601085395US letters “LT” that are molded into the Tire Markings sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum Safety Standards Load Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Code (TIN) 5 — Maximum 2 — Size Desi- Temporary high pressure compact spare Pressure tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded gnation 6 — Treadwear, into the sidewall preceding the size 3 — Service De- Traction and Tem- designation. Example: T145/ scription perature Grades 80D18 103M. High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

205 Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE R = Construction code "R" means radial construction, or "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

206 EXAMPLE: Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 207 Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a Cold Tire Inflation Pressure minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation Maximum Inflation Pressure pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, Tire Placard the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Note: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.

0806115151US

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) GUID-054900418-high.tif Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 0806115150US Example Tire Placard Location (Door) 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. 208 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. Steps For Determining Correct Load (6) If your vehicle will be towing a 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the Limit— trailer, load from your trailer will be front, rear, and spare tires. (1) Locate the statement “The transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this Loading combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or reduces the available cargo and The vehicle maximum load on the tire XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. luggage load capacity of your vehicle. must not exceed the load carrying Metric Example For Load Limit capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You (2) Determine the combined weight will not exceed the tire's load carrying of the driver and passengers that will For example, if “XXX” amount equals capacity if you adhere to the loading be riding in your vehicle. 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg conditions, tire size, and cold tire passengers in your vehicle, the amount of inflation pressures specified on the Tire (3) Subtract the combined weight of available cargo and luggage load capacity and Loading Information placard in the driver and passengers from XXX is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And kg or XXX lbs. shown in step 4. Operating” section of this manual. (4) The resulting figure equals the Note: Note: Under a maximum loaded vehicle available amount of cargo and condition, gross axle weight ratings If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles luggage load capacity. For example, load from your trailer will be transferred must not be exceeded. For further if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and to your vehicle. The following table information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, there will be five 150 lb passengers shows examples on how to calculate and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle total load, cargo/luggage, and towing in your vehicle, the amount of capacities of your vehicle with varying Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” available cargo and luggage load section of this manual. seating configurations and number and capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 size of occupants. This table is for To determine the maximum loading (5x150) = 650 lbs.) illustration purposes only and may not conditions of your vehicle, locate the be accurate for the seating and load statement “The combined weight of (5) Determine the combined weight carry capacity of your vehicle. occupants and cargo should never of luggage and cargo being loaded on exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire the vehicle. That weight may not For the following example, the and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants and combined weight of occupants, safely exceed the available cargo and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight luggage load capacity calculated in (392 kg). (if applicable) should never exceed the Step 4. weight referenced here.

209 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

GUID-054900419-high.tif

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

210 Tires — General Information Unequal tire pressures from one side of Tire Inflation Pressures the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle Tire Pressure to drift to the right or left. The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear Proper tire inflation pressure is essential Always drive with each tire inflated to the edge of the driver's side door. to the safe and satisfactory operation of recommended cold tire inflation pressure. your vehicle. Four primary areas are At least once a month: affected by improper tire pressure: Check and adjust tire pressure with a Both under-inflation and over-inflation good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Safety and Vehicle Stability affect the stability of the vehicle and can Do not make a visual judgement when produce a feeling of sluggish response or Economy determining proper inflation. Tires may over responsiveness in the steering. Tread Wear look properly inflated even when they are Note: under-inflated. Ride Comfort Unequal tire pressures from side to Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. Safety side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response. Warning! Unequal tire pressure from side to Caution! side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. Improperly inflated tires are dangerous Fuel Economy After inspecting or adjusting the tire and can cause collisions. pressure, always reinstall the valve stem Underinflated tires will increase tire cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from Underinflation increases tire flexing and rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel entering the valve stem, which could damage can result in overheating and tire failure. consumption. the valve stem. Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to Tread Wear cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in Improper cold tire inflation pressures can Inflation pressures specified on the tire failure. cause abnormal wear patterns and placard are always “cold tire inflation reduced tread life, resulting in the need pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is Overinflated or underinflated tires can for earlier tire replacement. defined as the tire pressure after the affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability vehicle has not been driven for at least Proper tire inflation contributes to a three hours, or driven less than 1 mile Unequal tire pressures can cause steering comfortable ride. Over-inflation (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of problems. Youcould lose control of your three hours. The cold tire inflation vehicle. produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. 211 Check tire pressures more often if Tire Pressures For High Speed Recommended Cold Tire Inflation subject to a wide range of outdoor Operation Pressures temperatures, as tire pressures vary with For vehicle speeds below 100 mph temperature changes. The manufacturer advocates driving at (160 km/h), recommended cold tire Tire pressures change by approximately safe speeds and within posted speed inflation pressures are listed on the Tire 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air limits. Where speed limits or conditions And Loading Information Placard located temperature change. Keep this in mind are such that the vehicle can be driven at on driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge when checking tire pressure inside a high speeds, maintaining correct tire of the driver's side door. inflation pressure is very important. garage, especially in the Winter. When driving at speeds 100 mph Increased tire pressure and reduced Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (160 km/h) and above, increased tire vehicle loading may be required for (20°C) and the outside temperature = pressures and reduced vehicle loading high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation are required for high-speed vehicle your authorized tire dealer or original pressure should be increased by 3 psi operation. equipment vehicle dealer for (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for recommended safe operating speeds, For driving speeds above 100 mph every 12°F (7°C) for this outside loading and cold tire inflation pressures. (160 km/h) recommended cold tire temperature condition. inflation pressures are listed below Tire pressure may increase from 2 to under "High Speed Tire Inflation 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO Warning! Pressure". Vehicle loading condition must

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE NOT reduce this normal pressure build up not exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg) (driver + or your tire pressure will be too low. three passengers + 88 lbs. (40kg) High speed driving with your vehicle under luggage). maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. Youcould have a serious collision. Do not Warning! drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. Youcould have a serious collision.

212 Recommended Cold High Speed Tire Tire Inflation Inflation Pressure Tires Wheel Pressure

Front Rear Front Rear 35 psi/ 42 psi/ 245/35Z R19 93Y XL 19x8.5J – – 240kpa 290kpa Original Equipment 32 psi/ 42 psi/ 285/30Z R19 98Y XL 19x10J – – 220kpa 290kpa 35 psi/ 42 psi/ 245/35R19 93V XL M+S 19x8.5J – – 240kpa 290kpa Snow Tires 285/30R19 98V XL M+S or 32 psi/ 42 psi/ 19x10J – – 265/35R19 98V XL M+S 220kpa 290kpa

Radial Ply Tires The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of mode it has limited driving capabilities an inch (6 mm). and needs to be replaced immediately. A Warning! Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire Run Flat tire is not repairable. repairs and additional information. It is not recommended driving a vehicle Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer Combining radial ply tires with other types that have experienced a loss of pressure while a tire is in the run flat mode. of tires on your vehicle will cause your should be replaced immediately with See the tire pressure monitoring section vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires another Run Flat tire of identical size and for more information. service description (Load Index and in sets of four. Never combine them with Tire Spinning other types of tires. Speed Symbol). Run Flat Tires — If Equipped When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice Tire Repair conditions, do not spin your vehicle's Run Flat tires allow you the capability to wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for If your tire becomes damaged, it may be drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph longer than 30 seconds continuously repaired if it meets the following criteria: (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation without stopping. The tire has not been driven on when pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is flat. referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation The damage is only on the tread pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). section of your tire (sidewall damage is Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat not repairable). 213 becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place When the tread is worn to the tread wear with as little exposure to light as Warning! indicators, the tire should be replaced. possible. Protect tires from contact with Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this oil, grease, and gasoline. Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces section for further information. generated by excessive wheel speeds may Replacement Tires Life Of Tire cause tire damage or failure. A tire could The tires on your new vehicle provide a explode and injure someone. Do not spin The service life of a tire is dependent balance of many characteristics. They your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds upon varying factors including, but not should be inspected regularly for wear continuously when you are stuck, and do not limited to: and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter Driving style. what the speed. that you use tires equivalent to the Tire pressure - Improper cold tire originals in size, quality and performance inflation pressures can cause uneven when replacement is needed. Refer to the Tread Wear Indicators wear patterns to develop across the tire paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in Tread wear indicators are in the original tread. These abnormal wear patterns will this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading equipment tires to help you in reduce tread life, resulting in the need for Information placard or the Vehicle determining when your tires should be earlier tire replacement. Certification Label for the size replaced. designation of your tire. The Load Index SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Distance driven. and Speed Symbol for your tire will be Performance tires, tires with a speed found on the original equipment tire rating of V or higher, and Summer tires sidewall. typically have a reduced tread life. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found Rotation of these tires per the vehicle in the “Tire Safety Information” section of scheduled maintenance is highly this manual for more information relating recommended. to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. It is recommended to replace the two

0806104865NA Warning! front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Tire Tread Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever 1 — Worn Tire Tires and the spare tire should be replaced 2 — New Tire replace a wheel, make sure that the after six years, regardless of the remaining wheel’s specifications match those of the tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. Youcould lose original wheels. These indicators are molded into the control and have a collision resulting in It is recommended you contact your bottom of the tread grooves. They will serious injury or death. authorized tire dealer or original appear as bands when the tread depth 214 equipment dealer with any questions you Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped may have on tire specifications or Caution! capability. Failure to use equivalent The compact spare is for temporary replacement tires may adversely affect emergency use only. Youcan identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact the safety, handling, and ride of your Replacing original tires with tires of a vehicle. different size may result in false spare by looking at the spare tire speedometer and odometer readings. description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the Warning! Spare Tires — If Equipped sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, Repair Kit instead of a spare tire, please “S” preceding the size designation. or speed rating other than that specified for refer to “Tire Repair Kit” in “In Case Of Example: T145/80D18 103M. your vehicle. Some combinations of Emergency” for further information. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire unapproved tires and wheels may change Since this tire has limited tread life, the suspension dimensions and performance original equipment tire should be characteristics, resulting in changes to Caution! steering, handling, and braking of your repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on vehicle. This can cause unpredictable your vehicle at the first opportunity. handling and stress to steering and Because of the reduced ground clearance, do Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to suspension components. Youcould lose not take your vehicle through an automatic mount a conventional tire on the compact control and have a collision resulting in car wash with a compact or limited use spare wheel, since the wheel is designed serious injury or death. Use only the tire and temporary spare installed. Damage to the specifically for the compact spare tire. wheel sizes with load ratings approved for vehicle may result. Do not install more than one compact your vehicle. spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any Never use a tire with a smaller load index given time. or capacity, other than what was originally Spare Tire Matching Original equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a Equipped Tire And Wheel — If smaller load index could result in tire Equipped overloading and failure. Youcould lose control and have a collision. Yourvehicle may be equipped with a Failure to equip your vehicle with tires spare tire and wheel equivalent in look having adequate speed capability can result and function to the original equipment in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle tire and wheel found on the front or rear control. axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. 215 equipped tire on the front or rear axle of Yourwheels are susceptible to your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of deterioration caused by salt, sodium Warning! this limited use spare tire affects vehicle chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium handling. Since it is not the same as your chloride, etc., and other road chemicals Compact and collapsible spares are for original equipment tire, replace (or used to melt ice or control dust on dirt temporary emergency use only. With these repair) the original equipment tire and roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild spares, do not drive more than 50 mph reinstall on the vehicle at the first soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have opportunity. harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can limited tread life. When the tread is worn to damage the wheel’s protective coating the tread wear indicators, the temporary use that helps keep them from corroding and spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to Warning! tarnishing. follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare Caution! tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, Full Size Spare — If Equipped do not drive more than the speed listed on The full size spare is for temporary the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to Avoid products or automatic car washes that the cold tire inflation pressures listed on use acidic solutions or strong alkaline emergency use only. This tire may look your Tire and Loading Information Placard additives or harsh brushes. Many like the originally equipped tire on the SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace car washes may damage the wheel's not. This spare tire may have limited (or repair) the original equipment tire at the protective finish. Such damage is not tread life. When the tread is worn to the first opportunity and reinstall it on your covered by the New Vehicle Limited tread wear indicators, the temporary use vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of Warranty. Only car wash soap, Wheel full size spare tire needs to be replaced. vehicle control. Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Wheel And Wheel Trim Care When cleaning extremely dirty wheels original equipment tire and reinstall on including excessive brake dust, care must All wheels and wheel trim, especially the vehicle at the first opportunity. be taken in the selection of tire and wheel aluminum and chrome plated wheels, cleaning chemicals and equipment to Limited Use Spare — If Equipped should be cleaned regularly using mild prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain The limited use spare tire is for Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome their luster and to prevent corrosion. temporary emergency use only. This tire Cleaner or their equivalent is Wash wheels with the same soap solution is identified by a label located on the recommended or select a non-abrasive, recommended for the body of the limited use spare wheel. This label non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or vehicle. contains the driving limitations for this chrome wheels. spare. This tire may look like the original 216 Tire Types Caution! All Season Tires — If Equipped Warning! All Season tires provide traction for all Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. Winter). Traction levels may vary conditions. Youcould lose vehicle control, These products may damage the wheel's between different all season tires. All resulting in severe injury or death. Driving protective finish. Such damage is not season tires can be identified by the M+S, too fast for conditions also creates the covered by the New Vehicle Limited possibility of loss of vehicle control. Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely Snow Tires affect the safety and handling of your Note: If you intend parking or storing vehicle. Some areas of the country require the your vehicle for an extended period after use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, Summer Or Three Season Tires — If tires can be identified by a drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to Equipped “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire remove the water droplets from the sidewall. brake components. This activity will Summer tires provide traction in both If you need snow tires, remove the red rust on the brake rotors wet and dry conditions, and are not select tires equivalent and prevent vehicle vibration when intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If in size and type to the braking. your vehicle is equipped with Summer original equipment Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin tires, be aware these tires are not tires. Use snow tires Chrome, or Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels designed for Winter or cold driving only in sets of four; conditions. Install Winter tires on your failure to do so may vehicle when ambient temperatures are adversely affect the safety and handling less than 45°F (7°C) or if roads are of your vehicle. Caution! covered with ice or snow. For more Snow tires generally have lower speed information, contact an authorized ratings than what was originally equipped dealer. If your vehicle is equipped with these with your vehicle and should not be specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel Summer tires do not contain the all operated at sustained speeds over cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. season designation or mountain/ 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above They will permanently damage this finish snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original and such damage is not covered by the New Use Summer tires only in sets of four; equipment or an authorized tire dealer Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH failure to do so may adversely affect the for recommended safe operating speeds, ONLYUSING MILD SOAP AND WATERWITH safety and handling of your vehicle. A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this loading and cold tire inflation pressures. is all that is required to maintain this finish. 217 While studded tires improve Tire Rotation Recommendations performance on ice, skid and traction Caution! Tires on the front and rear axles of capability on wet or dry surfaces may be vehicles operate at different loads and poorer than that of non-studded tires. perform different steering, driving, and Some states prohibit studded tires; To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, braking functions. For these reasons, therefore, local laws should be checked observe the following precautions: they wear at unequal rates. These effects before using these tire types. Because of restricted traction device can be reduced by timely rotation of clearance between tires and other Tire Chains (Traction Devices) suspension components, it is important that tires. Rotation will increase tread life, Use of traction devices require sufficient only traction devices in good condition are maintain traction levels and contribute to tire-to-body clearance. Follow these used. Broken devices can cause serious a smooth, quiet ride. recommendations to guard against damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if To resolve this problem, tires should be damage. noise occurs that could indicate device rotated at each service interval breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the (approximately every 10,000 miles Note: device before further use. [16,000km]). More frequent rotation is Traction device must be of proper Install device as tightly as possible and permissible if desired. The reasons for size for the tire, as recommended by the then retighten after driving about ½ mile any rapid or unusual wear should be traction device manufacturer (0.8 km). corrected prior to rotation being performed. Use on Rear Tires Only Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Due to limited clearance, the Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns following traction devices are and large bumps, especially with a loaded recommended: vehicle. Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry For a 265/35R19 98V tire, use of a pavement. zero-clearance snow traction device recommended. Observe the traction device It is not possible to install traction manufacturer’s instructions on the method devices on 285/30R19 tires. of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

218 Tire Rotations Not Recommended - If DEPARTMENT OF practices, and differences in road Equipped TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM characteristics and climate. Due to different size tires and wheels on TIRE QUALITY GRADES front and rear axles tire rotation is not Traction Grades The following tire grading categories possible for: The Traction grades, from highest to were established by the National 2.9 L V6 Engine Equipped with 19” lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These Highway Traffic Safety tires and wheels grades represent the tire's ability to Administration. The specific grade stop on wet pavement, as measured rating assigned by the tire's under controlled conditions on manufacturer in each category is specified government test surfaces shown on the sidewall of the tires on of asphalt and concrete. A tire your vehicle. marked C may have poor traction All passenger vehicle tires must performance. conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Warning! 09066S0002EM Treadwear Tire Rotation The Treadwear grade is a The traction grade assigned to this comparative rating, based on the tire is based on straight-ahead Caution! wear rate of the tire when tested braking traction tests, and does not under controlled conditions on a include acceleration, cornering, Damage to the vehicle may occur if 19” front specified government test course. hydroplaning, or peak traction and rear tires are rotated For example, a tire graded 150 would characteristics. wear one and one-half times as well Tire rotation contributes to the on the government course as a tire preservation of the grip and traction Temperature Grades graded 100. The relative performance on wet, muddy or snowy The temperature grades are A (the performance of tires depends upon roads, guaranteeing optimal driveability highest), B, and C, representing the of the vehicle. the actual conditions of their use, tire's resistance to the generation of In the case of irregular wear of the tires however, and may depart heat and its ability to dissipate heat, identify the cause and correct it as soon significantly from the norm due to when tested under controlled as possible, by contacting an authorized variations in driving habits, service dealer. conditions on a specified indoor 219 laboratory test wheel. Sustained high STORING THE VEHICLE allow humidity to evaporate from the surface of the vehicle. temperature can cause the material If the vehicle is left inactive for longer Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) of the tire to degenerate and reduce than a month, the following precautions tire life, and excessive temperature should be observed: above the standard prescribed pressure can lead to sudden tire failure. The Park the vehicle in an area that is and check it periodically. Do not drain the engine cooling grade C corresponds to a level of covered and dry, and well-ventilated if possible. Slightly open the windows. system. performance, which all passenger Any time the vehicle is left inactive for vehicle tires must meet under the Check that the electric park brake is not activated. two weeks or more, operate the air Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Carry out the procedure: “manual trunk conditioning system with engine idling Standard No. 109. Grades B and A opening device” procedure described in for at least five minutes, setting external represent higher levels of this paragraph. air and with fan set to maximum speed. performance on the laboratory test Disconnect the negative battery This operation will ensure appropriate wheel, than the minimum required by terminal and check the battery charge. lubrication for the system, thus law. Repeat this check once every three minimizing the possibility of damage to months during storage. the compressor when the system is If the battery is not disconnected from operated again.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Warning! the electrical system, check its state of Note: After cycling the ignition to STOP charge every thirty days. and having closed the driver side door, wait at least one minute before The temperature grade for this tire Clean and protect the painted parts using protective wax. disconnecting the electrical supply from is established for a tire that is the battery. When reconnecting the Clean and protect the shiny metal properly inflated and not electrical supply to the battery, make parts using special compounds available overloaded. Excessive speed, sure that the ignition is in the STOP commercially. under-inflation, or excessive position and the driver side door is Sprinkle talcum powder on the closed. loading, either separately or in windshield wiper rubber blades, and lift Manual Trunk Opening Device combination, can cause heat them off the glass. buildup and possible tire failure. Cover the vehicle with a fabric or Proceed as follows if the battery needs to be disconnected: perforated plastic sheet, paying particular care not to damage the painted 1. From the trunk interior covering, surface by dragging any dust that may rotate the plug to the left of the lock and have accumulated on it. Do not use extract the strap connected to it. compact plastic sheets, as they do not 220 2. Make sure the free end of the strap BODYWORK Preserving The Bodywork remains outside the deck lid when closing Paint the deck lid. Protection Against Atmospheric Agents Touch up abrasions and scratches The vehicle is equipped with the best immediately to prevent the formation of available technological solutions to rust. protect the bodywork against corrosion. Maintenance of paintwork consists of These include: washing the car: the frequency depends Painting products and systems which on the conditions and environment where the car is used. For example, it is give the vehicle resistance to corrosion advisable to wash the vehicle more often and abrasion. in areas with high levels of atmospheric Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) pollution or salted roads. steel sheets, with high resistance to Some parts of the vehicle may be 09086S0001EM corrosion. covered with a matte paint which, in Trunk Compartment Spraying of plastic parts, with a order to be maintained intact, requires 3. The trunk can now be opened protective function in the more exposed special care. manually by pulling the strap. points: underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc. To correctly wash the vehicle, follow Note: This procedure must be carried Use of “open” boxed sections to these instructions: out exclusively in safe places because it prevent condensation and pockets of If high pressure jets or cleaners are allows to open the trunk unconditionally. moisture which could favor the formation used to wash the vehicle, keep a distance of rust inside. of at least 15 inches (40 cm) from the Use of special films to protect against bodywork to avoid damage or alteration. abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. rear wing, Build up of water could cause damage to doors, etc.). the vehicle in the long term. To make it easier to remove any dirt Corrosion Warranty deposits in the area where the blades are Yourvehicle is covered by Corrosion normally located it is recommended to Warranty against perforation due to rust position the windshield wipers vertically of any original element of the structure (service position), for more information, or bodywork. For the general terms of refer to “Dealer Service” in this chapter. this warranty, refer to the Warranty Booklet. Wash the bodywork using a low pressure jet of water if possible.

221 Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy INTERIORS solution over the bodywork, frequently Caution! Periodically check the cleanliness of the rinsing the sponge. interior, beneath the mats, which could Rinse well with water and dry with a cause oxidation of the sheet metal. leather chamois. Wipe the rear window inside gently with a cloth following the direction of the filaments Seats And Fabric Parts Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door to avoid damaging the heating device. frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.) with Remove dust with a soft brush or a special care, as water may stagnate more vacuum cleaner. It is advised to use a easily in these areas. Do not wash the car Front Headlights moist brush on velvet upholstery. Rub the after it has been left in the sun or with the Use a soft cloth soaked in water and seats with a sponge moistened with a hood hot: this may alter the shine of the detergent for washing . solution of water and neutral detergent. paintwork. Note: Leather Seats — If Equipped Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in the same way as the rest of the vehicle. Never use aromatic substances Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or If washing the car in a service that moves (e.g. gasoline) or ketones (e.g. acetone) slightly damp cloth, without exerting too the car, for cars with automatic for cleaning the plastic lenses of the much pressure. transmissions, PARK (P) must be cut out. headlights. Remove any liquid or grease stains using Youhave to shut off the engine in the When cleaning with a pressure an absorbent dry cloth, without rubbing. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE following conditions: car stopped, washer, keep the pressure washer at Then clean with a soft cloth or buckskin transmission in NEUTRAL (N), push the least eight inches (20 cm) away from the cloth dampened with water and mild starter button for at least three seconds. headlights. soap. If the stain persists, use specific products and observe the instructions Note: Avoid parking under trees; the Engine Compartment resin dropped by trees makes the carefully. paintwork go opaque and increases the At the end of every winter, wash the Note: Never use alcohol. Make sure that possibility of corrosion. engine compartment thoroughly, taking the cleaning products used contain no care not to aim the jet of water directly at alcohol or alcohol derivatives, even in Windows the electronic control units or at the small quantities. Use specific detergents and clean cloths windshield wiper motors. Have this to prevent scratching or altering the operation performed at a specialized Plastic And Coated Parts transparency. workshop. Clean interior plastic parts with a damp Note: The washing should take place with cloth (if possible made from microfiber), the engine cold and the ignition device in and a solution of water and neutral, the STOP position. After the washing non-abrasive detergent. operation, make sure that the various protections (e.g. rubber caps and guards) have not been removed or damaged. 222 To clean oily or persistent stains, use specific products free from solvents and designed to maintain the original appearance and color of the components. Remove any dust using a microfiber cloth, if necessary moistened with water. The use of paper tissues is not recommended as these may leave residues. Genuine Leather Parts — If Equipped Use only water and mild soap to clean these parts. Never use alcohol or alcohol-based products. Before using a specific product for cleaning interiors, make sure that it does not contain alcohol and/or alcohol based substances. Carbon Fiber Parts To eliminate small scratches and marks on the carbon, contact your authorized dealer. An improperly performed operation may irreparably damage the carbon.

223 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Everything you may find useful for IDENTIFICATION DATA ...... 225 understanding how your vehicle is made ENGINE ...... 226 and works is contained in this chapter POWER SUPPLY ...... 227 and illustrated with data, tables and TRANSMISSION ...... 228 graphics. For the enthusiasts and the BRAKES ...... 229 technician, but also just for those who SUSPENSION ...... 230 want to know every detail of their vehicle. STEERING SYSTEM...... 231 DIMENSIONS...... 232 WEIGHTS ...... 234 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...... 235 FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 237 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 238

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PERFORMANCE ...... 240

224 IDENTIFICATION DATA This number is also printed on the chassis Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) at the front left shock absorber and can Plate Vehicle Identification Number be seen by opening the engine The plates are located on the left side A The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) compartment hood. is stamped on a plate on the front left pillar and contain the data about: corner of the dashboard cover, which can Chassis number (VIN). be seen from outside the vehicle, through Vehicle type (USA and Canada only). the windshield. Color code. Place of manufacturing of the vehicle (USA and Mexico only). Vehicle manufacturing date. Maximum permitted weights. Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA and Canada only).

10016S0002EM Vehicle Identification Number

10016S0001EM Vehicle Identification Number

225 ENGINE

2.9L V6 Engine Cycle Four Number and position of cylinders 6/V Piston bore and stroke (mm) 86.5 × 82 Total displacement (cm³) 2891 Compression ratio 9.3:1 Maximum power (SAE) (kW) 375 Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 505 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 6500

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Maximum torque (SAE) (Nm) 600 Maximum torque (SAE) (ft. lb) 443 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2500 87 Octane Minimum, 91 Recommended, ethanol percentage is Fuel 0–15%. (*) (*) To comply with all emission limits while simultaneously guaranteeing minimal consumption and maximum performance, use premium-quality unleaded gasoline with octane rating (A.K.I.) of 91 or higher.

226 POWER SUPPLY

Power supply Phased sequential electronic injection with knock control and variable 2.9L V6 Engine intake valve actuation

227 TRANSMISSION

Model Transmission Traction 2.9L V6 Engine Eight forward gears plus reverse Rear TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

228 BRAKES

Model Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake Disc Disc 2.9L V6 Engine or or Electric Carbon Ceramic disc Carbon Ceramic disc

Caution!

Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied. To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.

229 SUSPENSION

Model Front Rear Independent wheel double-wishbone 2.9L V6 Engine Independent wheel with multilink system suspension TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

230 STEERING SYSTEM

Model Curb-to-curb turning circle Type Rack and pinion with electric power 2.9L V6 Engine 37.10 ft (11.30 m) steering

231 DIMENSIONS

Dimensions Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

10106S0002EM

AB C D EFGH I 31.30 111.02 40.31 182.64 56.14 61.22 63.27 79.69 73.74

232 Luggage Compartment Volume Capacity (V.D.A. standards) Rear seats not folded Vehicle unladen: 16.96 cubic feet

233 WEIGHTS

Weights (lbs) 2.9 V6 Engine Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and 3806 without optional equipment) Payload including the driver (*) 905 Maximum permitted loads (**) 155 – front axle 2260 –rearaxle 2646 – total 4774 Towable loads – (*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS permitted loads. (**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

234 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Reformulated Gasoline Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) Many areas of the country require the This engine is designed or gasoline containing methanol are not use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to meet all emission the responsibility of the manufacturer to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. regulations, and and may void or not be covered under Reformulated gasoline contains provide satisfactory New Vehicle Limited Warranty. fuel economy and oxygenates and are specifically blended performance when to reduce vehicle emissions and improve CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications air quality. using high-quality Modifications that allow the engine to unleaded “Regular” The use of reformulated gasoline is run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or gasoline having a posted octane number recommended. Properly blended liquid propane (LP) may result in damage of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/ reformulated gasoline will provide to the engine, emissions, and fuel system 2 method. For optimal performance the improved performance and durability of components. Problems that result from use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” engine and fuel system components. running CNG or LP are not the gasoline is recommended in these Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends responsibility of the manufacturer and engines. may void or not be covered under the While operating on gasoline with the Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded New Vehicle Limited Warranty. required octane number, hearing a light gasoline with oxygenates such as knocking sound from the engine is not a ethanol. MMT In Gasoline cause for concern. However, if the engine Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese is heard making a heavy knocking sound, Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese- Caution! see your dealer immediately. Use of containing metallic additive that is gasoline with a lower than recommended blended into some gasoline to increase octane number can cause engine failure DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol octane. Gasoline blended with MMT and may void or not be covered by the or gasoline containing more than 15% provides no performance advantage New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may beyond gasoline of the same octane Poor quality gasoline can cause problems result in starting and drivability problems, number without MMT. Gasoline blended such as hard starting, stalling, and damage critical fuel system components, with MMT reduces spark plug life and hesitations. If you experience these cause emissions to exceed the applicable reduces emissions system performance symptoms, try another brand of gasoline standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction in some vehicles. The manufacturer Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please before considering service for the observe pump labels as they should clearly recommends that gasoline without MMT vehicle. communicate if a fuel contains greater than be used in your vehicle. The MMT content 15% ethanol (E-15). of gasoline may not be indicated on the

235 gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask Indiscriminate use of fuel system The use of fuel additives, which are now your gasoline retailer whether the cleaning agents should be avoided. Many being sold as octane enhancers, is not gasoline contains MMT. MMT is of these materials intended for gum and recommended. Most of these products prohibited in Federal and California varnish removal may contain active contain high concentrations of methanol. reformulated gasoline. solvents or similar ingredients. These can Fuel system damage or vehicle performance harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm problems resulting from the use of such fuels Materials Added To Fuel materials. or additives is not the responsibility of the Besides using unleaded gasoline with the manufacturer and may void or not be Fuel System Cautions proper octane rating, gasolines that covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Caution! Using gasolines that have these additives Note: Intentional tampering with the will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions control system can result in emissions, and maintain vehicle Follow these guidelines to maintain your civil penalties being assessed against performance. vehicle’s performance: you. Designated TOP TIER The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited Detergent Gasoline by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS contains a higher level emissions control system. of detergents to further aide in An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or minimizing engine and ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic fuel system deposits. converter to overheat. If you notice a When available, the usage of TopTier pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or Detergent gasoline is recommended. malfunctioning and may require immediate Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of service. Contact your authorized dealer for TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. service assistance.

236 FLUID CAPACITIES 2.9L V6 Engine

U.S. Metric Fuel tank 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters Fuel tank reserve 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters Engine cooling system 2.95 Gallons 11.2 Liters Intercooler cooling system 1.4 Gallons 5.5 Liters Engine sump and filter 7.2 Quarts 7 Liters Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters Automatic transmission – – Differentials and reduction gears RDU 195 – – Main body: 0.8 Quarts Main body: 0.8 Liters Differentials and reduction gears RDU 230-TV Left TV: 0.5 Quarts Left TV: 0.5 Liters Right TV: 0.6 Quarts Right TV: 0.6 Liters RDU 230-LSD differential – – RDU 210-eLSD differential (if equipped) – – RDU 210/215-LSD differential – –

237 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Yourvehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration. 2.9L V6 — Engine Lubrication

Features Specification Replacement interval SAE 0W-40 FPT 9.55535-Z2 Pennzoil Ultra According to the Maintenance Plan MS-12991 API SN If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to top up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

238 Chassis Lubrication

Use Features Specification Applications ZF 8HP 50 - Synthetic ATF – Automatic transmission SAE 75W-140 API GL-4 synthetic FPW9.55550-MZ8 Lubricants and greases lubricant Differential and reduction units SAE 75W-85 API GL-5 synthetic RDU 230-TV / 2.9 V6 engine FPW9.55550-DA8 lubricant Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes CUNA NC 956-16 Use rate 50% Not mixable with Engine coolant MS.90032 ASTMD3306 different formulation products. (*) To be used diluted or undiluted in Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043 windshield washer/wiper systems R1234yf or R134yf HVAC –– (depending on market) (*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

239 PERFORMANCE Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

Acceleration from 0–60 mph/0-100 km/h Model Maximum speed mph sec. 2.9L V6 Engine 191 3.8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

240 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . .242 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...... 242 WARRANTY INFORMATION .....244 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . .244 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . .245

241 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to the SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE manufacturer's customer center should The manufacturer and its authorized include the following information: Prepare For The Appointment dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Owner's name and address If you are having warranty work done, be with our products and services. sure to bring the right papers with you, as Owner's telephone number (home and well as your warranty folder. All work to Warranty service must be done by an office) authorized dealer. We strongly be performed may not be covered by the Authorized dealer name warranty. Discuss additional charges with recommend that you take the vehicle to the service manager. Keep a maintenance an authorized dealer. They know your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) vehicle the best, and are most concerned log of your vehicle's service history, as Vehicle delivery date and mileage this can often provide a clue to the that you get prompt and high quality current problem. service. The manufacturer's authorized Alfa Romeo Customer Center dealer have the facilities, factory-trained Prepare A List technicians, special tools, and the latest P.O.Box 21–8004

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Make a written list of your vehicle's information to ensure the vehicle is fixed problems or the specific work you want correctly and in a timely manner. Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA done. If you've had an accident or work This is why you should always talk to an (1-844-253-2872) done that is not on your maintenance log, authorized dealer service manager first. Alfa Romeo Customer Center (Canada) let the service advisor know. Most matters can be resolved with this process. P.O.Box 1621 Be Reasonable With Requests If for some reason you are still not Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 If you list a number of items and you must satisfied, talk to the general manager or Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English) have your vehicle by the end of the day, owner of the authorized dealer. They Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French) discuss the situation with the service want to know if you need assistance. advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you If an authorized dealer is unable to may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal resolve the concern, you may contact the daily charge. If you need a rental, it is manufacturer's customer center. advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

242 Customer Assistance For The Hearing manufacturer's Service Contract Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) National Customer Hotline at Warning! 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, To assist customers who have hearing call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) difficulties, the manufacturer has 387-9983 French). installed special TDD Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines (Telecommunication Devices for the The manufacturer will not stand behind only), some of its constituents, and certain any service contract that is not the vehicle components contain, or emit, Deaf) equipment at its customer center. chemicals known to the State of California Any hearing or speech impaired manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract to cause cancer and birth defects, or other customer, who has access to a TDD or a reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the other than the manufacturer's service contained in vehicles and certain products of United States, can communicate with the contract. If you purchased a service component wear contain, or emit, chemicals manufacturer by dialing contract that is not a manufacturer's known to the State of California to cause 1-800-380-CHRY. service contract, and you require service cancer and birth defects, or other after the manufacturer's New Vehicle reproductive harm. Canadian residents with hearing Limited Warranty expires, please refer to difficulties that require assistance can the contract documents, and contact the use the special needs relay service person listed in those documents. offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for We appreciate that you have made a Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to major investment when you purchased connect with a Bell Relay Service the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also operator. made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are Service Contract absolutely delighted with the ownership Youmay have purchased a service experience. Youwill be pleased with their contract for a vehicle to help protect you sincere efforts to resolve any warranty from the high cost of unexpected repairs issues or related concerns. after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the 243 WARRANTY INFORMATION REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In Canada See the Warranty Information Booklet, In The 50 United States And If you believe that your vehicle has a for the terms and provisions of FCA US Washington, D.C. safety defect, you should contact the LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle Customer Service Department and market. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or immediately. Canadian customers cause injury or death, you should who wish to report a safety defect to immediately inform the National the Canadian government should Highway Traffic Safety contact Transport Canada, Motor Administration (NHTSA) in addition Vehicle Defect Investigations and to notifying FCA US LLC. Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to If NHTSA receives similar http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ . complaints, it may open an CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. Youcan also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov . 244 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Owner's Manuals To order the following manuals, you may These Owner's Manuals have been use either the website or the phone prepared with the assistance of service numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, and engineering specialists to acquaint American Express, and Discover orders you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. are accepted. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures Service Manuals as well as specifications, capabilities and These comprehensive Service Manuals safety tips. provide the information that students Call toll free at: and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) solving, maintaining, servicing, and 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the Or vehicle, system, and/or components is Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: written in straightforward language with www.techauthority.com illustrations, diagrams, and charts. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

245 INDEX Air Pressure, Tires ...... 211 Chart, Tire Sizing ...... 206 Accessories Purchased By The Alarm (Security Alarm) ...... 19 Checking Levels ...... 194 Owner...... 3 Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) .....139 Checking YourVehicle For Safety . . .122 INDEX Active Aerodynamics ...... 56 Alfa DNA System...... 136 Checks, Safety ...... 122 Active Safety Systems ...... 87 Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System ....87 Child Restraint ...... 113 Active TorqueVectoring (ATV) Automatic Dimming Mirror ...... 32 Child Restraints System ...... 90 Automatic Headlights ...... 33 Booster Seats ...... 115 Adaptive Cruise Control...... 145 Automatic Temperature Control Child Restraints ...... 113 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (ATC)...... 42 Child Seat Installation ...... 121 (Cruise Control) ...... 145 Automatic Transmission ...... 131 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Additional Heaters...... 47 Auxiliary Driving Systems ...... 90 Belt ...... 119 Additives, Fuel ...... 236 Infants And Child Restraints . . . .114 AirBag...... 106 B-Pillar Location ...... 208 LATCH Positions ...... 116 Air Bag Components ...... 105,110 Battery ...... 196 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Air Bag Operation ...... 107 Battery Recharging ...... 197 Children ...... 116 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 105 Belts, Seat ...... 123 Older Children And Child Restraints ...... 114 Driver Knee Air Bag ...... 107 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 90 Seating Positions ...... 115 Enhanced Accident Response . . .188 Bodywork (Cleaning And Event Data Recorder (EDR) .....188 Maintenance) ...... 221 Using The TopTether Anchorage . .121 Front Air Bag ...... 106 Brakes ...... 229 Clean Air Gasoline ...... 235 If A Deployment Occurs ...... 110 Brake Fluid Level ...... 196 Cleaning Wheels ...... 216 Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 107 Brightness, Interior Lights ...... 38 Climate Control ...... 41,43 Maintaining YourAir Bag Bulbs, Light ...... 124 System ...... 112 Close The Hood...... 49 Redundant Air Bag Warning Camera, Rear ...... 159 Compact Spare Tire ...... 215 Light ...... 105 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 123 Contract, Service...... 243 Side Air Bags ...... 108 Cargo Tie-Downs ...... 51 Courtesy Mirror Light (Bulb Replacement) ...... 171 Transporting Pets ...... 122 Certification Label ...... 162 Air Bag Light...... 105,123 Changing A Flat Tire ...... 204 Air Bag Maintenance...... 112 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . .145 Emergency Refuelling ...... 185 Exterior Lights ...... 33,124 Cupholder ...... 55 Emergency Starting ...... 182 External Lights ...... 33 Cupholders ...... 55 Emergency, In Case Of...... 179 Customer Assistance ...... 242 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 168 Fire Extinguisher ...... 55 Jacking ...... 204 Flashers Daytime Running Lights...... 33 Jump Starting ...... 182,183 Hazard Warning ...... 168 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) ...... 33 Overheating ...... 185 Turn Signal ...... 35,124 Defroster, Windshield ...... 123 Tow Hooks ...... 187 Fluid Leaks ...... 124 Dimensions ...... 232 Towing...... 186 Fluids And Lubricants ...... 238 Direction Indicators (Changing A Engine ...... 226 Forward Collision Warning ...... 92 Bulb)...... 171 Engine Coolant Level ...... 195 Front Light Cluster With Main Beam Disabled VehicleTowing...... 186 Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 123 (Bulb Replacement)...... 171 Door Locks Fuel Requirements ...... 235 Child-Protection Door Lock — Front Mobile Spoiler (Alfa Active Rear Doors ...... 24 Jump Starting ...... 182,183 Aero) ...... 56 Power Door Locks ...... 24 Overheating ...... 185 Front Seat Electric Heating ...... 27 Doors...... 20 Starting ...... 184 Front Seats (Power Seats) ...... 26 Drive Train Control (DTC) System ....87 Temperature Gauge ...... 59 Front Wipers Wiper Operation ...... 39 Driving Modes ...... 137 Engine Compartment ...... 194 Fuel Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Engine Compartment (Washing) . . . .222 System ...... 89 Engine Oil Additives ...... 236 Level Check ...... 195 Clean Air ...... 235 Electric Park Brake...... 128 Engine Overheating ...... 185 Ethanol ...... 235 Electric Remote Mirrors ...... 32 Enhanced Accident Response Gauge ...... 59 Electric Steering Wheel Heating.....31 Feature ...... 188 Materials Added ...... 236 Electronic Speed Control ...... 143 Environmental Protection Systems. . .55 Methanol ...... 235 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Ethanol ...... 235 Fuse Boxes ...... 174 Control) ...... 143,145 Exhaust Gas Caution...... 123 Fuses (Replacement) ...... 173 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Exhaust System ...... 123 System ...... 88 Exterior Lighting ...... 33,34 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ....52 Gasoline, Clean Air ...... 235 Instrument Cluster Display Types Of Bulbs ...... 169 Gasoline, Reformulated ...... 235 Instrument Cluster Display ...... 60 Light Switch...... 33 Gauges Reconfigurable Instrument Lights...... 124

INDEX Cluster Display ...... 60 Speedometer ...... 59 AirBag...... 105,123 Instrument Panel Features Tachometer ...... 59 Automatic Headlights ...... 33 Instrument Panel Features ...... 58 General Information ...... 92,151 Courtesy/Reading ...... 36,37 Interior Ambient Lighting ...... 37 Glove Compartment ...... 51 Daytime Running ...... 33 Interior Lights...... 36 Glove Compartment Light ...... 37 Exterior ...... 124 Interiors (Cleaning)...... 222 Glove Compartment Light (Bulb Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 168 Replacement) ...... 172 Internal Equipment ...... 51 Headlight Switch ...... 33,34 GVWR...... 162 Jack Operation ...... 204 Headlights ...... 33,34 High Beam ...... 34 Hazard Warning Flasher...... 168 Jump Starting ...... 182,183 Instrument Cluster ...... 33,34 Head Restraints ...... 29 Intensity Control ...... 38 Head Rests ...... 29 Key Fob Remote Keyless Entry ...... 14 Interior ...... 37 Headlights Keyless Entry System/Immobilizer Map Reading ...... 36 Switch ...... 33,34 System ...... 18 Park...... 34 Headlights (Cleaning) ...... 222 Reading ...... 36 Heated Mirrors ...... 33 Lane Change ...... 35 Turn Signal ...... 35,124 High Beam Headlights...... 34 Lane Change And Turn Signals ...... 35 Loading Vehicle ...... 162 Automatic...... 35 High Beam Headlights Lane Departure Warning System . . .156 Tires ...... 208 Hill Start Assist (HSA) System...... 89 LaneSense...... 156 Luggage Compartment Light (Bulb Hood...... 49 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 100 Replacement) ...... 172 Hood Release ...... 49 Latches...... 124 Luggage/Cargo Capacity ...... 50 Leaks, Fluid ...... 124 Identification Data ...... 225 Life Of Tires ...... 214 Manual, Service...... 245 Ignition...... 16 Lifting The Vehicle ...... 204 Methanol...... 235 Installing Electrical/Electronic Light Bulbs...... 124 Mirrors Devices...... 3 Automatic Dimming ...... 32 Electric Powered ...... 32 Radio Frequency Safety, Exhaust Gas ...... 123 Electric Remote ...... 32 General Information ...... 16,18,24 Saving Fuel ...... 163 Heated ...... 33 Radio Transmitters And Mobile SBL Function ...... 35 Phones ...... 4 Scheduled Servicing ...... 190 OBD System ...... 85 Rear Camera ...... 159 Scheduled Servicing Program Occupant Restraints...... 99 Rear Cross Path ...... 90 (2.9 V6 Gasoline Engine Overheating, Engine ...... 185 Rear Seats...... 28 Versions) ...... 191 Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . .245 Rear View Mirrors ...... 32 Seat Belt Reformulated Gasoline ...... 235 Energy Management Feature . . . .103 Paintwork (Cleaning And Refueling Procedure ...... 160 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . .102 Maintenance) ...... 221 Refueling The Vehicle ...... 160 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 100 Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System ....89 Refuelling ...... 237 Pregnant Women ...... 103 Park Sensors System ...... 152 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 100 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 103 Passive Entry (System) ...... 21 Remote Starting System ...... 126 Seat Belt Reminder...... 100 Performance (Top Speed)...... 240 Replacement Tires ...... 214 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 100 Pets...... 122 Replacing A Bulb ...... 168 Seat Belts ...... 99,123 Placard, Tire And Loading Replacing An External Bulb ...... 171 Child Restraint ...... 113 Information ...... 208 Replacing An Internal Bulb ...... 171 Front Seat ...... 99,100 Power Reporting Safety Defects ...... 244 Inspection ...... 123 Mirrors ...... 32 Restraint, Head...... 29 Pregnant Women ...... 103 Seats ...... 26 Restraints, Child ...... 113 Pretensioners ...... 103 Power Supply ...... 227 Rims And Tires ...... 205 Rear Seat ...... 100 Power Windows ...... 47 Untwisting Procedure ...... 102 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . .103 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle...... 123 Seats ...... 25 Pretensioners Safety Checks Outside Vehicle.....124 Adjustment ...... 25,26 Seat Belts ...... 103 Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 244 Head Restraints ...... 29 Prolonged Vehicle Inactivity ...... 220 Safety Information, Tire...... 205 Height Adjustment ...... 26 Power...... 26 Radial Ply Tires ...... 213 Safety Tips ...... 122 Tilting ...... 26 Service Assistance...... 242 Suggestions For Driving...... 163 Replacement ...... 214 Service Contract ...... 243 Sun Visors ...... 52 Safety ...... 205,211 Service Manuals ...... 245 Supplemental Restraint System - Air Sizes ...... 206 INDEX Servicing Procedures ...... 198 Bag...... 106 Snow Tires ...... 217 Shoulder Belts ...... 100 Suspension ...... 230 Spare Tire ...... 215,216 Signals, Turn...... 35,124 Symbols ...... 6 Spinning ...... 213 Snow Chains...... 218 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 214 Telescoping Steering Column ...... 30 Snow Tires...... 217 To Open Hood...... 49 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ...... 51 Spare Tire ...... 215,216 Tow Hooks, Emergency ...... 187 Tilt Steering Column...... 30 Speed Control Towing Accel/Decel ...... 144 Tire And Loading Information Disabled Vehicle ...... 186 Placard ...... 208 Cancel ...... 145 TowingTrailers ...... 163 Tire Markings ...... 205 Resume ...... 144 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Tire Safety Information ...... 205 Set...... 144 System)...... 96 Tire Service Kit ...... 179 Speed Control Traction Control System (TCS)...... 88 (Cruise Control) ...... 143,145 Tires ...... 124,211,215,219 Transmission ...... 228 Speed Limiter...... 142 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 214 Transporting Animals ...... 164 Starting ...... 184 Air Pressure ...... 211 Transporting Passengers ...... 164 Starting And Operating ...... 184 Changing ...... 204 Transporting Pets ...... 122 Starting Procedures ...... 184 Compact Spare ...... 215 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 214 Starting The Engine ...... 126 Flat Changing ...... 179 Turn Signals ...... 35 Steering General Information ...... 211,215 Tilt Column ...... 30 High Speed ...... 212 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 219 Wheel, Heated ...... 31 Inflation Pressures ...... 211 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt. . . .102 Wheel, Tilt ...... 30 Jacking ...... 204 Use Of The Owner’s Manual ...... 5 Steering System ...... 231 Life Of Tires ...... 214 Steering Wheel ...... 30 Load Capacity ...... 208,209 Vehicle Changes/Alterations ...... 3 Stop/Start System...... 140 Quality Grading ...... 219 Vehicle Identification Number .....225 Storage ...... 55 Radial ...... 213 Vehicle Loading ...... 162,209 Vent Operation ...... 41

Warning Flasher, Hazard ...... 168 Warranty Information ...... 244 Washer Fluid For Windshield/Headlights...... 196 Washers, Windshield...... 38 Weights ...... 234 Wheel And Wheel Trim...... 216 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...... 216 Wheels And Tires ...... 205 Windows (Cleaning) ...... 222 Windshield Defroster ...... 123 Windshield Wiper ...... 38 Replacing Blades ...... 201 Windshield Wiper/Washer Smart Washing Function ...... 39 Windshield Wipers ...... 38 Wrecker Towing...... 186

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA features and equipment that are either standard or op- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a EQUIPMENT Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable. manual that are not on this vehicle. equipment must be installed properly by trained person- accidents. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to nel. The following must be observed during installation. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- The positive power connection should be made directly Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. normal may require special precautions. drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- The negative power connection should be made to body portation. factured. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the WARNING! vehicle’s electronic systems. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may slower, and your judgment is impaired when you affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. vehicles so equipped. Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC 2017 GIULIA QUADRIFOLIGO

2017 GIULIA QUADRIFOLIGO 17GA-126-AD OWNER’S MANUAL ©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of Fourth Edition Rev 1 FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission. Printed in U.S.A.